User Service Guide
HP 9000 rp4410 and HP 9000 rp4440
Manufacturing Part Number: A9950-96011-ed4
Fourth Edition
September 2008
© Copyright 2003-2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Server Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Detailed Server Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
I/O Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Front Display Panel, DVD, and Diagnostic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mass Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Dimensions and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Controls, Ports, and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
USB Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
VGA Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
iLO MP LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Additional Controls and LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Powering the Server On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Powering On the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Powering Off the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Dimensions and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
AC Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
System Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Power and Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Environmental Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Nonoperating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Acoustic Noise Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Physical and Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Server Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Detailed Server Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
I/O Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Front Display Panel, DVD, and Diagnostic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mass Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Dimensions and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Installation Sequence and Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Unpacking and Inspecting the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Verifying Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Inspecting the Shipping Containers for Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Unpacking the Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Checking the Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Returning Damaged Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Unloading the Server with a Lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Service Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Accessing a Rack-Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Accessing a Pedestal-Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Front Panel Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Additional Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Front and Top Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
I/O Baseboard Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Installing Power Supplies and Disk Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installing Processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Installing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Hot-Pluggable PCI/PCI-X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Installing the Server Into a Rack, Non-HP rack, or Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
HP Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Non-HP Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Pedestal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Connecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
AC Input Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Core I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Applying Standby Power to the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Connecting to the LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Console Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Setting Up the Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Setup Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Setup Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using ARP Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using the RS-232 Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Logging In to the iLO MP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Additional Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Accessing the Host Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Accessing the Host Console With the TUI - CO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Interacting with the iLO MP Using the Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Powering the Server ON and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Powering On the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Powering Off the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Booting the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Supported Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Troubleshooting Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Troubleshooting Using the Server Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Server Does Not Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
BCH Menu is Not Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Operating System Does Not Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Operating System Boots with Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Intermittent Server Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DVD Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Hard Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Console Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Information to Collect Before You Contact Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Supported Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Standard HP-UX Booting Using Boot Console Handler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Booting HP-UX in Single-User Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Booting HP-UX in LVM Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Shutting Down HP-UX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Troubleshooting Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Troubleshooting System Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Using the Front Panel Power Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
System Does Not Successfully Power On and Remain Powered On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Operating System Boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Operating System Does Not Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Support Tools Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Event Monitoring Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
iLO MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
ODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Troubleshooting PCI/PCI-X Hot-Pluggable Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Front Control Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
I/O Baseboard LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Memory Extender Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Disk and I/O Path Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Core I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
System I/O Board Switches and Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Required Service Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Accessing a Rack-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Extend the Server from the Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Inserting the Server Into the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Accessing a Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Removing the Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Replacing the Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Front and Top Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Removing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Replacing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Removing the Top Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Replacing the Top Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Removing a Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Replacing the Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
System Memory DIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Replacing Deallocated Memory Ranks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Removing Memory DIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Installing Memory DIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Removing the Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Replacing the Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Replacing Dual Processor Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Dual Processor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Processor Load Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Removing a Dual Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Installing a Dual Processor Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Removing a Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Replacing a Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
I/O Baseboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Removing the I/O Baseboard Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Replacing the I/O Baseboard Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Removing and Replacing the I/O Baseboard Locking Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Battery Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Replacing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
PCI/PCI-X Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
OLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
OLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Removing a PCI/PCI-X Card Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Installing a PCI Card Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
OLX Dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Removing an OLX Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Replacing an OLX Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Time Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Upgrade Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Back Up Your System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Removing Server Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Removing the SCSI Duplex Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Removing the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Replacing the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Installing the SCSI Duplex Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Installing the Server Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Verify the Upgrade Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Converting SCSI From Duplex to Simplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Removing and Replacing Core I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Required Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
PCI Slot Locations and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Removing the LAN Core I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Installing the LAN Core I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Removing the SCSI Core I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Removing a Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Replacing a Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Removing the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Replacing the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Midplane Riser Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Removing the Midplane Riser Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Replacing the Midplane Riser Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Hot-Swappable Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Power Supply Load Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Removing a Hot-Swappable Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Replacing a Hot-Swappable Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Removing the Power Distribution Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Replacing the Power Distribution Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Removing a DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Replacing a DVD Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
DVD I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Removing a DVD I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Replacing a DVD I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Display Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Removing the Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Replacing the Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
QuickFind Diagnostic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Removing the QuickFind Diagnostic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Replacing the QuickFind Diagnostic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Customer Self Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Replacement Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Boot Console Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
BCH Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
iLO MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tables
Table 1. Publishing History Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Table 2. HP-UX 11i Releases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Table 1-1. Server Dimensions and Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 1-2. Control Panel LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table 1-3. Switch and Button LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 1-4. Power Supply Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Table 1-5. iLO MP LED Status Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 1-6. iLO MP LED Status Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table 1-7. Single-Port GigE LAN LED Status Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 1-8. Dual-Port GigE LAN Card LED Status Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 1-9. USB Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 1-10. Serial Port Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 1-11. iLO MP LAN Port Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 1-12. Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 1-13. SCSI Port Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 1-14. Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 1-15. DVD Drive LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 1-16. I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 1-17. Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 2-1. Minimum and Maximum Server Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 2-2. Server Dimensions and Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 2-3. Power Cords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 2-4. System Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 2-5. System Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 2-6. Typical Configuration Power Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 2-7. Physical and Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table 3-1. Server Dimensions and Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table 3-2. Installation Sequence Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 3-3. Control Panel LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 3-4. Switch and Button LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 3-5. Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 3-6. DVD Drive LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 3-7. Dual Processor Module Load Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Table 3-8. DIMM Filler Requirements for 16-DIMM Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 3-9. DIMM Filler Requirements for 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 3-10. Hot-Pluggable Hardware and Software Interfaces and OS Availability . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Table 3-12. Hot-Pluggable LED Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 3-13. Setup Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 3-14. Console Connection Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 3-15. LAN Configuration Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 3-16. ARP Ping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Table 3-17. Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tables
Table 3-18. Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and at BCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 3-19. Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and OS is Running . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 3-20. Server Power Button Functions When Server is Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 3-21. Front Control Panel LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Table 3-22. QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 5-1. Power Button Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table 5-2. ODE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 5-3. Front Control Panel LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Table 5-4. QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Table 5-5. I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Table 5-6. 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board LED States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Table 5-7. 16-DIMM Memory Extender Board LED States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Table 5-8. Internal Disk and DVD Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Table 5-9. Extended Core I/O Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Table 5-10. PCI I/O Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Table 5-11. System I/O Board Indicators, Connectors, and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Table 6-1. DIMM Filler Requirements for 16-DIMM Memory Extender Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Table 6-2. DIMM Filler Requirements for 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Table 6-3. Processor Load Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Table 6-4. PCI/PCI-X Card vs. Slot Frequency/Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared Slots . . . . . . 218
Table 6-5. PCI I/O Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Table 6-6. PCI I/O Hardware Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Table A-1. Customer Self Repair Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Table A-2. Replacement Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Table B-1. BCH Main Menu, Submenus, and Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Table B-2. Boot Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Table C-1. Physical and Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
Figure 1-1. HP 9000 rp4410/rp4440 Server (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 1-2. HP 9000 rp4410/rp4440 Server with Bezel Removed (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 1-3. HP 9000 rp4410/rp4440 Server (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 1-4. Control Panel - Front View of Server (with Bezel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 1-5. Accessing the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 1-6. Control Panel LEDs and Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 1-7. Rear Panel LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 1-8. Power Supply Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 1-9. iLO MP LAN LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 1-10. iLO MP LAN LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 1-11. Single-Port GigE LAN Connector and LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 1-12. Dual-Port GigE LAN Card LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 1-13. Server Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 1-14. USB Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 1-15. Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 1-16. iLO MP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 1-17. Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 1-18. SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 1-19. Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 1-20. DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 1-21. QuickFind Diagnostic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 1-22. I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 2-1. Airflow Through HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 3-1. HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Servers (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 3-2. HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Servers with Bezel Removed (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 3-3. HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Servers (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 3-4. Accessing T-25 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 3-5. Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 3-6. Front View with Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 3-7. Accessing the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 3-8. Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 3-9. Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 3-10. DVD or CD-RW/DVD LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 3-11. Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 3-12. Removing and Replacing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 3-13. Removing and Replacing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 3-14. Hot-Swappable I/O Fans (Units 0 and 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 3-15. Hot-Swappable Power Supply Fan (Unit 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 3-16. I/O Baseboard Locking Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 3-17. I/O Baseboard Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 3-18. System Battery Location on I/O Baseboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 3-19. Metal Cover in Unused Slot P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 3-20. Volume Filler Installation in Slot 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
Figure 3-21. Disk Drive Installation in Slot 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 3-22. Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 3-23. Extender Board Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 3-24. Removing the Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 3-25. Processor Cable Placed Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 3-26. Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 3-27. Installing the Processor on the Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 3-28. 16-DIMM Memory Extender Board Minimum Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 3-29. 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board Minimum Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 3-30. Removing the Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 3-31. Inserting DIMM Into the Extender Board Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 3-32. Slot ID Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 3-33. PCI/PCI-X OLX Divider Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 3-34. Inserting PCI/PCI-X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 3-35. Slider Gate Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 3-36. Removing the SCSI Jumper Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 3-37. Installing the Duplex Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 3-38. Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 3-39. Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Adapter Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 3-40. Ports on Server Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 3-41. iLO MP Setup Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 3-42. Web Login Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 3-43. Status Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 3-44. Front Control Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 3-45. QuickFind Diagnostic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 5-1. PCI/PCI-X LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 5-2. Front Control Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 5-3. QuickFind Diagnostic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 5-4. I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 5-5. 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 5-6. 16-DIMM Memory Extender Board LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 6-1. Accessing T-25 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 6-2. Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 6-3. Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 6-4. Removing and Replacing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 6-5. Removing and Replacing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 6-6. Memory Extender Board Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 6-7. Memory Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 6-8. 16-DIMM Memory Extender Board Slot IDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 6-9. 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board Slot IDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 6-10. Inserting DIMM into the Extender Board Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 6-11. Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 6-12. Dipswitch Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
Figure 6-13. Dipswitch Setting for S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 6-15. Locate the Socket in Processor Extender Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 6-16. Processor Cable Placed Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 6-17. Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 6-18. Installing Dual Processor Module on Processor Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 6-19. Hot-Swappable I/O Chassis Fans Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 6-21. I/O Baseboard Locking Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 6-22. I/O Baseboard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 6-23. S5102 Dipswitch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 6-24. Accessing the S5102 Dipswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 6-25. Battery Location on I/O Baseboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 6-26. Slot ID Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 6-27. PCI/PCI-X OLX Divider Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 6-28. PCI-X Card Latch Opening Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 6-29. Inserting PCI/PCI-X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 6-30. Slider Gate Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 6-31. OLX Divider Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 6-32. OLX Slider Gate Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 6-33. SCSI Cable B Connection to the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 6-34. Remove the SCSI Duplex Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 6-35. Remove the SCSI Backplane Jumper Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 6-36. Lift the SCSI Backplane Out of the Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 6-37. Aligning the Bracket Tabs on the SCSI Duplex Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 6-38. Connecting SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Adapter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 6-39. Unplugging SCSI Cable B from the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 6-40. Unplug SCSI Cable B from the SCSI Adapter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 6-41. Removing the Duplex Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 6-42. Installing the SCSI Jumper Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 6-43. LAN I/O Card Latch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 6-44. Installing the LAN I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 6-45. SCSI I/O Card latch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 6-46. Install SCSI I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 6-47. Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 6-48. Disk Drive Installation in Slot 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 6-49. Volume Filler Installation in Slot 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 6-50. SCSI Backplane Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 6-51. Midplane Riser Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 6-52. Hot-Swappable Power Supply Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 6-53. Power Distribution Board Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 6-54. DVD Drive Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 6-55. DVD I/O Board Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
Figure 6-56. Display Board Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 6-57. QuickFind Diagnostic Board Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Document
This document provides the information and instructions on servicing the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers:
The document printing date and part number indicate the document’s current edition. The printing date
changes when a new edition is printed. Minor changes may be made at reprint without changing the printing
date. The document part number changes when extensive changes are made.
Document updates may be issued between editions to correct errors or document product changes. To ensure
you receive the updated or new editions, subscribe to the appropriate product support service. See your HP
sales representative for details.
The latest version of this document can be found on the web at:
http://www.docs.hp.com.
Intended Audience
This document is intended to provide technical product and support information for authorized service
providers, system administrators, and HP support personnel.
This document is not a tutorial.
New and Changed Information in This Edition
This following changes are included in this edition:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The User Service Guide includes the contents of the Maintenance Guide and the Operations Guide.
Server specification and installation information.
I/O baseboard locking lever remove and replace procedures.
Replacing deallocated memory ranks procedure.
System power troubleshooting procedures.
Physical and environmental specifications table.
Publishing History
Table 1 lists the publishing history details for this document.
Table 1
Publishing History Details
Document
Manufacturing
Part Number
Operating Systems
Supported Product Versions
Publication Date
Supported
HP-UX 11i v1
HP-UX 11i v2
HP-UX 11i v3
A9950-96011-ed4
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
September 2008
A9950-96011
HP-UX 11i v1
HP-UX 11i v2
HP-UX 11i v3
April 2007
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 1
Document
Publishing History Details (Continued)
Operating Systems
Manufacturing
Part Number
Supported Product Versions
Publication Date
Supported
A9950-96001
A9950-96002
HP-UX 11i v1
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
April 2005
July 2003
N/A
HP-UX 11i v1
Document Organization
This guide is divided into the following chapters:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Overview: Provides views and descriptions of the server.
System Specifications: Server details such as system configuration, physical
specifications, and requirements.
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Installing the System: Unpacking, installation, and preparation for booting the operating
system.
Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System: Provides procedures to boot and
shut down the operating system.
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting: Provides diagnostics and basic troubleshooting methodology.
Removing and Replacing Components: Provides instructions and procedures on how to
remove and replace server components.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Replacement Parts: Provides a list of available customer self-repair parts.
Utilities: Provides information on the utilities on the server such as Boot Console Handler
(BCH) and Integrity iLO MP.
Appendix C
Physical and Environmental Specifications: Provides temperature and airflow
information for minimum, typical, and maximum configurations for the server. It also lists
the server and rack weights and dimensions.
Typographic Conventions
This document uses the following conventions.
WARNING
CAUTION
A warning lists requirements that you must meet to avoid personal injury.
A caution provides information required to avoid losing data or avoid losing system
functionality.
IMPORTANT Important messages provide essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
TIP
A note highlights useful information such as restrictions, recommendations, or important
details about HP product features.
Tips provide you with helpful hints for completing a task. A tip is not used to give essential
information, but can be used, for example, to provide an alternate method for completing the
task that precedes it.
Book Title
The title of a book. On the web and on the Instant Information CD, it can be a hot link to the
book itself.
KeyCap
The name of a keyboard key or graphical interface item (such as buttons, tabs, and menu
items). Return and Enter both refer to the same key.
Emphasis
Bold
Text that is emphasized.
Text that is strongly emphasized.
The defined use of an important word or phrase.
Text displayed by the computer.
Bold
ComputerOut
UserInput
Command
Option
Commands and other text that you type.
A command name or qualified command phrase.
An available option.
Screen Output Example of computer screen output.
[ ]
The contents are optional in formats and command descriptions. If the contents are a list
separated by |, you must select one of the items.
{ }
The contents are required in formats and command descriptions. If the contents are a list
separated by |, you must select one of the items.
...
|
The preceding element can be repeated an arbitrary number of times.
Separates items in a list of choices.
HP-UX Release Name and Release Identifier
Each HP-UX 11i release has an associated release name and release identifier. The uname (1) command with
the -roption returns the release identifier.
Table 2 shows the releases available for HP-UX 11i operating system.
Table 2
HP-UX 11i Releases
Release Identifier
B.11.20
Release Name
Supported Processor Architecture
HP-UX 11i v1.5
HP-UX 11i v1.6
HP-UX 11i v2
HP-UX 11i v3
PA-RISC
B.11.22
B.11.23
B.11.31
PA-RISC
PA-RISC, Intel® , Itanium
PA-RISC, Intel, Itanium
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Related Documents
You can find other information on HP server hardware management and diagnostic support tools in the
following publications.
Website for HP Technical Documentation:
http://docs.hp.com
Server Hardware Information:
http://docs.hp.com/en/hw.html
Diagnostics and Event Monitoring: Hardware Support Tools
Complete information about HP’s hardware support tools, including online and offline diagnostics and event
monitoring tools, is available at:
http://docs.hp.com/hpux/diag/
This site has manuals, tutorials, FAQs, and other reference material.
Website for HP Technical Support:
http://us-support2.external.hp.com/
Books about HP-UX Published by Prentice Hall
The http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/website lists the HP books that Prentice Hall currently publishes,
including the following:
•
HP-UX 11i System Administration Handbook
http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/prentice/ptr_0130600814.html
•
HP-UX Virtual Partitions
http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/prentice/ptr_0130352128.html
HP Books are available worldwide through bookstores, online booksellers, and office and computer stores.
HP Encourages Your Comments
HP encourages your comments concerning this document. We are truly committed to providing
documentation that meets your needs.
Send comments to:
Include title, manufacturing part number, and any comments, errors found, or suggestions for improvement
you have concerning this document. Also, please include what we did right so we can incorporate it into other
documents.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Overview
The HP 9000 rp4410 and the HP 9000 rp4440 servers are designed to be easy to install, service, and
maintain. They deliver performance, reliability, and availability in a compact, rack-dense design to meet the
most demanding enterprise-level computing requirements.
A rack-dense 4U form-factor maximizes the number of servers for each rack, up to 10 systems for each HP
10000 G2 series rack (42U). They fit easily into the HP 10000 G2 series rack and into many third-party racks
using side-mounted slides and a cable management arm that you can install quickly without tools.
You can equip the servers with up to eight 800 MHz or 1.0 GHz PA-8900 processors with 1.5 MB of on-chip L1
cache for each processor and 64 MB of shared L2 cache for each processor module, up to 128 GB RAM, and six
PCI-X I/O expansion slots.
The blue server identification LED can be activated locally or remotely for easy physical identification of
problem hardware, and the QuickFind diagnostic LED panel speeds problem diagnosis by identifying
defective or mismatched hardware components.
HP 9000 rp4410 Server
The HP 9000 rp4410 server is a PA-8900-based server in a 4U form factor. It is based on the same hardware
as the HP 9000 rp4440 server, but in the rp4410 server, two of the four processor sockets are disabled using
firmware, limiting it to a 2P/2C. Like the HP 9000 rp4440 server, the HP 9000 rp4410 server has full access to
all 16 or 32 memory slots (for a total of up to 128 GB of memory) and full access to all six PCI-X I/O slots.
Because it has a maximum of four processors, the HP 9000 rp4410 server qualifies for Oracle Standard
Edition licensing. The HP 9000 rp4410 server is available in 1P/1C, 1P/2C, and 2P/2C configurations and can
be easily upgraded to an HP 9000 rp4440 server using a firmware upgrade kit.
This chapter addresses the following topics:
•
•
•
•
19
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Server Views
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Server Views
Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2, and Figure 1-3 show the top, front, and rear views of the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers.
Figure 1-1
HP 9000 rp4410/rp4440 Server (Top View)
20
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Detailed Server Description
Figure 1-2
HP 9000 rp4410/rp4440 Server with Bezel Removed (Front View)
Figure 1-3
HP 9000 rp4410/rp4440 Server (Rear View)
Detailed Server Description
The following sections list information on the main subsystems within the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers.
I/O Subsystem
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
PCI-X slots available - 8.
— Two dedicated PCI slots: Slot 1 is for SCSI; slot 2 is for LAN.
— Four hot-pluggable PCI-X 66 MHz 64-bit 3.3V 25W slots with shared busses and I/O. Slots 3 and 4
share capabilities and slots 5 and 6 share capabilities.
— Two hot-pluggable PCI-X 133 MHz 64-bit 3.3V 15W slots dedicated for core I/O.
21
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Detailed Server Description
•
•
•
I/O bandwidth - 4 GBs.
Pinnacle FXe PCI video card.
PCI Gigabit, Fast Ethernet Controller with Wake-on-LAN enabled/disabled with BIOS setup.
Internal Core I/O
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
Dual channel SCSI U320 or U160 (PA8800 only) interface or RAID, two internal 68-pin connectors, two
68-pin external connectors.
•
•
•
•
SCSI backplane configured as either one or two channels.
One internal Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) connector for a slimline optical device (CD and DVD).
No floppy connector.
Optional dual channel U320 RAID controller, two internal 68-pin connectors, two 68-pin external
connectors (replaces SCSI interface).
External Core I/O
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Three external serial ports.
Two external USB ports.
Two SCSI U320 or U160 68-pin connectors (U160 for PA8800 only).
One or two 10/100/1000Base-T ethernet LAN connectors for copper cable.
Two USB 2.0 ports.
Three DB-9 ports (console, UPS, and modem).
Optional dual channel U320 RAID controller, two 68-pin external connectors (replaces SCSI interface).
Processors
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
•
800 MHz/1.5 GB cache or 1 GHz/1.5 GB cache per CPU.
Both processors are available with 32 MB or 64 MB L2 cache per dual processor module.
HP 9000 rp4410 server can have one processor or both processors of a single dual processor module
enabled, or two processors enabled in each of two dual processor modules.
•
HP 9000 rp4440 server can be 1P/2C, 2P/2C, 3P/2C, or 4P/2C.
Memory
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
•
•
16 DIMM slots on standard memory extender board.
32 DIMM slots on optional memory extender board.
Maximum memory size of 128 GB (4 GB DIMMs on 32-slot memory extender board).
Supports up to 32 Double Data Rate (DDR) registered ECC memory, in PC2100 DIMMs.
22
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Detailed Server Description
•
Supported DDR DIMM sizes:
— 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB
— Standard 184 pins 2.5V DDR266, CL2, registered, ECC
•
•
•
133 MHz memory bus frequency, 266 MTransfers/s data, 8.5 GB/s peak data bandwidth.
DIMMs loaded by quads enable interleaved mode and chip spare.
Requires that DIMMs within each group of four (quad) be identical.
Cooling
Six cooling fans with N+1 redundancy.
Power Supply Unit
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
One 1200 W hot-swappable power supply.
Optional second 1200 W hot-swappable power supply for N+1 redundancy.
Front Display Panel, DVD, and Diagnostic Panel
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
•
•
•
Front panel that provides the controls and indicators commonly used for operation.
DVD+RW drive (with CD-write capability); IDE interface; 48x speed.
Optional slimline DVD drive.
Power button and LED indicators for system status.
LED-based diagnostic panel.
Mass Storage
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
Up to two SCSI hot-pluggable hard disk drives.
Integrated Ultra-3 SCSI dual channel controller; 80 MB/s transfer rate with two 68-pin connectors. The
SCSI backplane is configured as either one or two channels.
•
•
Maximum internal storage of two 73 MB, 15K drives.
Optional integrated HP RAID controller.
Firmware
Firmware consists of many individually linked binary images that are bound together by a single framework
at run time. Internally, the firmware employs a software database called a device tree to represent the
structure of the hardware platform and to provide a means of associating software elements with hardware
functionality.
23
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Dimensions and Values
The firmware incorporates the BCH which provides an interface between the operating system and the
platform firmware. BCH uses data tables that contain platform-related information, and boot and run-time
service calls available to the operating system and its loader to provide a standard environment for booting.
The firmware supports the HP-UX 11i version 1 (or higher) operating system through the HP 9000 processor
family standards and extensions, and has no operating system-specific functionality included. The operating
system is presented with the same interface to system firmware, and all features are available to the
operating system.
Event IDs for Errors and Events
The server firmware generates event IDs similar to chassis codes for errors, events, and forward progress to
the Integrity Integrated Light-Out Management Processor (iLO MP) through common shared memory. The
Integrity iLO MP interprets and stores event IDs. Reviewing these events helps you diagnose and
troubleshoot problems with the server.
Dimensions and Values
Table 1-1 lists the dimensions and their values of the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Table 1-1
Dimension
Server Dimensions and Values
Value
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
6.8 in (17.3 cm)
19 in (48.2 cm)
27.2 in (69.0 cm)
Unloaded 88 lbs (40 kg)
Fully loaded 100 lbs (45.4 kg)
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
This section describes the controls, ports, and LEDs found on the front panel, rear panel, and internal
locations of the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Front Panel
The front panel of the server provides the controls and indicators commonly used for operation.
24
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Figure 1-4 shows the control panel on the server front.
Figure 1-4 Control Panel - Front View of Server (with Bezel)
Control Panel
Figure 1-5 shows how to access the control panel. The front control panel access door is on the bezel.
Figure 1-5
Accessing the Control Panel
25
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Figure 1-6 shows the control panel LEDs and buttons.
Figure 1-6
Control Panel LEDs and Buttons
System LED
Power LED
Power Button
Disk LED
TOC/NMI Button
Thermal LED
Locator
Button/LED
Table 1-2 lists the control panel LED status and descriptions.
Table 1-2
Control Panel LED Definitions
State Flash Rate Color
Green
LED or
Button
Description
System LED Running
System LED Booting
Steady
Flashing at 0.5 Hz
System normal, OS up and running.
OS booting or at BCH.
Green
Yellow
System LED Attention Flashing at 1 Hz
Warning-system needs attention.
Redundancy lost, component failure pending.
System LED Fault
System LED Off
Flashing at 2 Hz
Red
Hard fault. system halted.
System off.
Off
N/A
Power LED
Power LED
Power LED
Disk LED
On
On
Off
Steady
Green
Yellow
Off
Power normal.
Flashing at 1 Hz
Off
Housekeeping voltage present.
Power off.
Flashing at rate of
disk activity
Green
Disk activity.
Thermal
LED
OK
Steady
Green
Yellow
Blue
Thermal OK.
Thermal
LED
Warning
Flashing at 1 Hz
Flashing at 1 Hz
Thermal warning.
Locator
Button or
LED
System locator LED can be remotely or
locally activated or deactivated. There is also
a locator button on the rear panel of the
server. Pressing either button turns both
LEDs on or off and enables or disables the
locator function.
26
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Table 1-3 lists LED definitions for the switches and buttons.
Table 1-3 Switch and Button LED Definitions
Switch and Button
Description
Power Button
Controls the power supply (turns system power on or off) if power is available to
the power supply. (Controls both power supplies if two are installed).
If power is off but power is available to the power supplies, pressing the power
button does the following:
•
From zero to five turns on the power supplies and applies power to server
circuits.
•
More than five seconds then released, has no effect.
If power is on and the system is at initial system loader, pressing the power
button:
•
•
Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect.
More than one second, but less than five seconds—do not use. This initiates
e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the server.
•
More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.
If power is on and the system is at BCH, pressing the power button does the
following:
•
•
From zero to five sceonds has no effect.
More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.
If power is on but the OS has been shut down, pressing the power button:
•
•
Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect.
More than one second, but less than five seconds—do not use. This initiates
e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the servers.
•
More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.
If the OS is running, pressing the power button does the following:
•
•
Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect.
More than one second, but less than five seconds—do not use. This initiates
e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the servers.
•
More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.
NMI Button
Use a paper clip to press this button. Press the non-maskable interrupt (NMI)
button before restarting the system after a the system hangs. NMI provides crash
dump capture capability. Obtain a system hardware status dump to use in root
cause analysis and debugging. The same function is available with the CM>TCiLO
MP command.
27
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Rear Panel
The server rear panel includes communication ports, I/O ports, ac power connectors, two power supply bays,
attention LED indicators for the hot-pluggable PCI boards, and the locator LED button. LEDs located on the
rear panel of the server signal the operational status of the following components:
•
•
•
•
Power supplies
iLO MP LAN
Gigabit Ethernet card LAN
PCI slots 3-8
Figure 1-7 shows the rear panel LEDs.
Figure 1-7
Rear Panel LEDs
Gigabit Ethernet LAN LEDs
iLO MP LAN LEDs
6 PCI Attention LEDs
Locator Button/LED
Power Supply Status LEDs
Each power supply unit has three status LEDs located on the power supply rear side. The front control panel
power status LED reports a consolidated status of all power supplies.
28
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Figure 1-8 show the power supply status LEDs.
Figure 1-8
Power Supply Status LED
Predict Fail
LED (Amber)
Power LED (Green)
Fail LED (Amber)
Table 1-4 lists power supply status LED information.
Table 1-4
Power Supply Status LED
Power LED
(Green)
Predict Fail
LED (Amber)
Fail LED
(Amber)
Status
Off
Off
Off
No ac power is applied to all PSUs.
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Off
No ac power is applied to this PSU only.
ac present and the standby outputs are on.
PSU dc outputs are on and OK.
Power supply failure.
Blinking
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Blinking
Predictive failure. The PSU is about to fail because of a
poorly performing fan.
On
Off
Blinking
Current limit on 48 VDC output.
29
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
iLO MP LAN LEDs
NOTE
There are two different iLO MP cards that were installed in this server. They have different
LEDs on them. Both of them are shown below.
One of the iLO MP LAN cards has the amber LED on the left abd the green LED on the right. It is shown in
Figure 1-9. The internal Integrity iLO MP LAN uses an RJ-45 type connector. This connector has two LEDs
(LAN link and LAN activity) that signal status and activity.
Figure 1-9
iLO MP LAN LEDs
100 M Link/Activity, Amber LED
10 M Link/Activity, Green LED
USB Ports
Locator Button and LED
Table 1-5 provides iLO MP LED status descriptions.
Table 1-5 iLO MP LED Status Descriptions
LED
Condition
Status
100 M amber
100 M amber
10 M green
10 M green
On
Linked at 100 MBs. No activity.
Linked at 100 MBs. Activity present.
Linked at 10 MBs. No activity.
Blinking
On
Blinking
Linked at 10 MBs. Activity present.
30
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
The other iLO MP LAN card has the green LED on the left and the amber LED on the right. Is is shown in
Figure 1-10
iLO MP LAN LEDs
100 M Link/Activity, Green LED
10 M Link/Activity, Amber LED
USB Ports
Locator Button and LED
Table 1-6 provides iLO MP LED status descriptions.
Table 1-6 iLO MP LED Status Descriptions
LED
Condition
Status
100 M green
100 M green
10 M amber
10 M amber
On
Linked at 100 MBs. No activity.
Linked at 100 MBs. Activity present.
Linked at 10 MBs. No activity.
Blinking
On
Blinking
Linked at 10 MBs. Activity present.
Single-Port Gigabit Ethernet LAN Card
The single-port Gigabit Ethernet LAN card uses an RJ-45 LAN connector. This connector has four LEDs
(three LAN link and one LAN activity) that signal link speed and activity.
Figure 1-11
Single-Port GigE LAN Connector and LEDs
RJ-45 Connector
Activity
10
1000
100
31
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Table 1-7 lists the single-port Gigabit Ethernet LAN card LED status descriptions.
Table 1-7
Single-Port GigE LAN LED Status Descriptions
LED
Color
Green
Condition
Status
Activity
Activity
Activity
On
Off
Linked. No activity.
No link.
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Blinking
On
Linked. Activity present.
Link speed—1000 MBs.
Link speed—100 MBs.
Link speed—10 MBs.
1000-BaseT
100-BaseT
10-BaseT
On
On
Figure 1-12 and Table 1-8 shows the dual-port Gigabit Ethernet LAN card LEDs and status descriptions.
Figure 1-12
Dual-Port GigE LAN Card LEDs
PCI-X
Dual-Port
1000Base-T
Port B
RJ-45 Connectors
Activity/Link LEDs
}
Flashing = Data traffic
Solid
= Active link
Port A
Speed LEDs
10 Mbit/s
Off
=
Green = 100 Mbit/s
Yellow = 1000 Mbit/s
32
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Table 1-8
Dual-Port GigE LAN Card LED Status Descriptions
Condition Status
LED
Activity
Activity
Speed
Flashing
Solid
Linked, data traffic.
Active link.
Off
Link speed 10 Mbit/s.
Link speed 100 Mbit/s.
Link speed 1000 Mbit/s.
Speed
Green
Amber
Speed
Ports and Connectors
Figure 1-13
Server Rear View
HBA, Ultra 3 SCSI, 68 Pin
Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port
Local Aux Remote
3 Serial Ports
iLO MP LAN Port
USB Ports
Video Port
(Disabled)
The SCSI HBA card in slot 1 and the Gigabit Ethernet card in slot 2 are factory installed.
33
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
USB Ports
Figure 1-14
USB Port Connector
Table 1-9
Pin Number
USB Pinouts
Signal Description
1
2
3
4
+5 VDC
MR
PR
Ground
VGA Port
The VGA (video) port is disabled on the rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Serial Ports
Figure 1-15
Serial Port Connector
Table 1-10
Pin Number
Serial Port Pinouts
Signal Description
1
Data carrier detect
34
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Table 1-10
Pin Number
Serial Port Pinouts (Continued)
Signal Description
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Receive data
Transmit data
Data term ready
Ground
Data set ready
Request to send
Clear to send
Ring indicator
iLO MP LAN Port
Figure 1-16
iLO MP Port
100M Link/Activity
Green LED
10M
Link/Activity
Amber LED
1
8
Table 1-11
Pin Number
iLO MP LAN Port Pinouts
Signal Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TXP
TXN
RXP
Not used
Not used
RXN
Not used
Not used
35
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port
Figure 1-17
Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port
Table 1-12
Pin Number
Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port Pinouts
Signal Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RXP
RXN
TXP
Not used
Not used
TXN
Not used
Not used
SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin
Two Ultra 3, 68-pin SCSI connectors are located on the HBA located in PCI slot 1. The upper connector
supports SCSI channel A and the lower connector supports SCSI channel B.
36
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Figure 1-18
SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin
Table 1-13
SCSI Port Pinouts
Signal Description
Pin Number
Pin Number
35
Signal Description
S35 (–DB 12)
1
S1 (+DB 12)
S2 (+DB 13)
S3 (+DB 14)
S4 (+DB 15)
S5 (+DB P 1)
S6 (+DB 0)
2
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
S36 (–DB 13)
S37 (–DB 14)
S38 (–DB 15)
3
4
5
S39 (–DB P 1)
S40 (–DB 0)
S41 (–DB 1)
S42 (–DB 2)
S43 (–DB 3)
S44 (–DB 4)
S45 (–DB 5)
S46 (–DB 6)
S47 (–DB 7)
S48 (–DB P)
S49
6
7
S7 (+DB 1)
8
S8 (+DB 2)
9
S9 (+DB 3)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
S10 (+DB 4)
S11 (+DB5)
S12 (+DB 6)
S13 (+DB 7)
S14 (+DB P)
S15
S16 (DIFFSENS)
S17 (TERMPWR)
S18 (TERMPWR)
S19 (RESERVED)
S20
S50
S51 (TERMPWR)
S52 (TERMPWR)
S53 (RESERVED)
S54
37
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Table 1-13
SCSI Port Pinouts (Continued)
Pin Number
Signal Description
S21 (+ATN)
Pin Number
55
Signal Description
S55 (–ATN)
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
S22
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
S56
S23 (+BSY)
S24 (+ACK)
S25 (+RST)
S26 (+MSG)
S27 (+SEL)
S28 (+C/D)
S29 (+REQ)
S30 (+I/O)
S31 (+DB 8)
S32 (+DB 9)
S33 (DB 10)
S34 (DB 11)
S57 (–BSY)
S58 (–ACK)
S59 (–RST)
S60 (–MSG)
S61 (–SEL)
S62 (–C/D)
S63 (–REQ)
S64 (–I/O)
S65 (–DB 8)
S66 (–DB 9)
S67 (–DB 10)
S68 (–DB 11)
38
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Additional Controls and LEDs
Storage devices have additional LEDs showing their status.
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LEDs
Figure 1-19
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Indicators
Status LED
Activity LED
Table 1-14
LED
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Definitions
State
Description
Activity LED
Status LED
Flashing green
Solid green
Drive is active.
Drive is operating (power applied).
DVD Drives
The server is delivered with one DVD drive. DVD-R and DVD-RW drives are optional. Each of these devices
has one activity LED.
Figure 1-20
DVD Drive
Activity LED
Eject Button
Emergency Eject
Table 1-15
DVD Drive LED Definitions
State
LED
Description
Activity LED
Flashing green
Drive is active.
39
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel
The QuickFind diagnostic panel has 27 single color LEDs and one multi-color LED for temperature. The
LEDs are normally off. The appropriate LED is turned on when an error is detected or a replacement part is
required.
Accessing the QuickFind Diagnostic Panel
You can access the QuickFind diagnostic panel by removing the top cover. Use the QuickFind diagnostic panel
Figure 1-21 shows the QuickFind diagnostic panel.
Figure 1-21
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel
Processor
Subsystem
I/O VRM
CPU VRM
Fan
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
Power Supply
Memory Config Error
Processor Config Error
Missing Component
System Temperature
Check Event Log
I/O Baseboard LED Indicators
You can find LEDs, sensors, reset, and attention buttons on the I/O baseboard.
40
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Controls, Ports, and LEDs
Figure 1-22 shows the I/O baseboard LEDs, buttons, and sensors and Table 1-16 lists their definitions.
Figure 1-22
I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors
Battery
3.3 VSB
Power
LED
BMC
Reset
Button
12V VRM LED
PCI Attention
LED
PCI Attention
Button
5V VRM
LED
PCI Power LED
iLO MP Soft
Reset
Button
iLO MP Heartbeat LED
3.3V VRM LED
PCI Attention LED
iLO MP
Self-Test
LED
Locator Button/LED
BMC Heartbeat LED
41
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Powering the Server On and Off
Table 1-16
LED/Button
I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors
Color
Status
On
Condition
12V VRM is functioning.
12V VRM Power LED
5V VRM Power LED
3.3V VRM Power LED
iLO MP Heartbeat
Green
Green
Green
Green
Amber
On
5V VRM is functioning.
On
3.3V VRM is functioning.
Blinking
On
The iLO MP is functioning correctly.
The iLO MP is executing the internal self test.
iLO MP Self Test LED
Off
The iLO MP passed the internal self test.
BMC Heartbeat
Green
Blinking
The baseboard management controller (BMC) is
functioning correctly.
3.3 VSB Power LED
Green
N/A
On
Standby power is available.
Resets the iLO MP values.
iLO MP Soft Reset
Button
Press
Powering the Server On and Off
This section provides information on how to power off and power on the server.
Power States
The server has three power states:
•
•
•
Standby power
Full power
Off
Plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle on the rear of the server to achieve the standby power
state; the front panel power button is not turned on. Full power occurs when the power cord is plugged into
the appropriate receptacle and either the power is activated through the iLO MP PCcommand, or the power
button is activated. In the off state, the power cords are not plugged in.
Table 1-17 lists the server power states.
Table 1-17
Power States
Power Activated through the
iLO MP PCCommand; or
Front Panel Power Button
Activated?
Power Cable
PluggedInto
Receptacle?
Standby
DC Voltage
Applied?
DC Voltage
Applied?
Power States
Standby power
Yes
No
Yes
No
42
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Powering the Server On and Off
Table 1-17
Power States (Continued)
Power Activated through the
Power Cable
PluggedInto
Receptacle?
Standby
DC Voltage
Applied?
iLO MP PCCommand; or
Front Panel Power Button
Activated?
DC Voltage
Applied?
Power States
Full power
Off
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
NOTE
If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PR command, the server
automatically powers on to the full power state.
Powering On the Server
Power on the server to full power using the following methods if the server is in the standby power state:
•
•
iLO MP PC command
Power button
Powering On the Server Using the iLO MP
NOTE
If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PRcommand, the server
automatically powers on to the full power state.
To power on the server using the iLO MP, follow these steps:
Step 1. Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.
Step 2. Initiate a console session, and access the MP Main Menu.
Step 3. Enter CM to enable command mode.
Step 4. Enter PC to use the remote power control command.
Step 5. Enter ON to power on the server, and enter YESwhen prompted to confirm the action.
Step 6. Start the operating system.
Powering On the Server Manually
NOTE
If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PRcommand, the server
automatically powers on to the full power state.
To manually power on the server, follow these steps:
Step 1. Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.
43
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Powering the Server On and Off
Step 2. Press the power button to start the server.
Step 3. Start the operating system.
Powering Off the Server
Power off the server using the following methods if the server is in the standby or full power state:
•
•
iLO MP PC command
Power button
Powering Off the Server Using the iLO MP
To power off the server using the iLO MP, follow these steps:
Step 1. Gracefully shut down the operating system.
Step 2. Initiate a console session, and access the MP Main Menu.
Step 3. Enter CM to enable command mode.
Step 4. Enter PC to use the remote power control command.
Step 5. Enter OFF to power off the server, and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action.
IMPORTANT The main dc voltage is now removed from the system; however, ac voltage for
standby power is still present in the server.
Step 6. Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.
Powering Off the Server Manually
To manually power off the server, follow these steps:
Step 1. Gracefully shut down the operating system.
Step 2. Press the power button to power off the server.
IMPORTANT The main dc voltage is now removed from the system; however, ac voltage for
standby power is still present in the server.
Step 3. Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.
44
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 System Specifications
This chapter provides information on the basic system configuration, physical specifications, and
requirements for the HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server.
This chapter addresses the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
System Configuration
Table 2-1 lists the minimum and maximum configuration options for the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Table 2-1
Minimum and Maximum Server Configurations
Component
Microprocessors
rp4410
rp4440
One or two dual-core processor modules, Up to four dual-core processor modules,
each containing two PA RISC
800 MHz/1.5 MB cache or
each containing two PA RISC
800 MHz/1.5 MB cache or
1 GHz/1.5 MB cache. The CPUs are
available with 32 MB or 64 MB L2
cache. A single CPU or all installed
CPUs can be activated.
1 GHz/1.5 MB cache. The CPUs are
available with 32 MB or 64 MB L2 cache.
All installed CPUs (2, 4, 6, or 8) are
activated.
Memory
Supports up to 16 Double Data Rate
(DDR) registered ECC memory, in
PC2100 DIMMs. Up to 32 DDR DIMMs
can be optionally used. Maximum
memory is 128 GB. Supported DDR
Supports up to 16 Double Data Rate
(DDR) registered ECC memory, in
PC2100 DIMMs. Up to 32 DDR DIMMs
can be optionally used. Maximum
memory is 128 GB. Supported DDR
DIMM sizes: 256 MB and 512 MB, 1 GB, DIMM sizes: 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2
2 GB, and 4 GB.
GB, and 4 GB.
HDDs
2-36 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI
hot-plug disks or
2-36 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI
hot-plug disks or
2-73 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI
hot-plug disks or
2-146 GB, 10K RPM Ultra320 SCSI
hot-plug disks.
2-73 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI
hot-plug disks or
2-146 GB, 10K RPM Ultra320 SCSI
hot-plug disks.
SCSI
LAN
Integrated Ultra-3 SCSI dual channel
controller; 80 Mb/s transfer rate with
two external 68-pin connectors.
Integrated Ultra-3 SCSI dual channel
controller; 80 Mb/s transfer rate with
two external 68-pin connectors.
PCI GB Fast Ethernet controller.
PCI GB Fast Ethernet controller.
45
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Dimensions and Values
Table 2-1
Minimum and Maximum Server Configurations (Continued)
Component
rp4410
rp4440
PCI Slots
Two dedicated for LAN and SCSI; four
64-bit PCI-X slots, 66 MHz, 3.3V slots;
and two 64-bit PCI-X slots, 133 MHz,
3.3V slots.
Two dedicated for LAN and SCSI; four
64-bit PCI-X slots, 66 MHz, 3.3V slots;
and two 64-bit PCI-X slots, 133 MHz,
3.3V slots.
Core I/O
DVD
Three serial ports, two USB ports,
integrated RJ-45 LAN.
Three serial ports, two USB ports,
integrated RJ-45 LAN.
DVD-R/CD drive, IDE interface, 48x
speed.
DVD-R/CD drive, IDE interface, 48x
speed.
External storage
Power supply
Two external SCSI ports.
Two external SCSI ports.
One power supply standard. A second
power supply (optional) for 1+1
configuration.
One power supply standard. A second
power supply (optional) for 1+1
configuration.
Dimensions and Values
Table 2-2 provides dimensions and their values of HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Table 2-2
Server Dimensions and Values
Dimension
Value
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
6.8 in (17.3 cm)
19 in (48.2 cm)
27.2 in (69.0 cm)
Unloaded 88 lbs (40 kg)
Fully loaded 100 lbs (45.4 kg)
Height
6.8 in (17.3 cm)
Grounding
The site building must provide a safety ground or protective earth for each ac service entrance to all cabinets.
Install a protective earthing (PE) conductor that is identical in size, insulation material, and thickness to the
branch-circuit supply conductors. The PE conductor must be green with yellow stripes. The earthing
conductor is to be connected from the unit to the building installation earth or, if supplied by a separately
derived system, at the supply transformer or motor-generator set grounding point.
46
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Electrical Specifications
This section provides electrical specifications for the server.
AC Power Cords
Table 2-3 lists the power cables available for use with the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Table 2-3 Power Cords
Part Number
Description
Country
South Africa
8120-5341
8120-1351
Power Cord C15/S Africa 2.5m black CA ASSY 917
Power Cord C13/BS-1363 2.3m black CA ASSY 900
United Kingdom
Hong Kong
Singapore
8120-1369
8120-1689
8120-2104
8120-6814
8120-0698
Power Cord C13/AS-3112 2.0m gray CA ASSY 901
Power Cord C13/CEE 7 2.0m black CA ASSY 902
Power Cord C13/SEV 12 2.0m black CA ASSY 906
Power Cord OPT-912 3-COND 2.25-M-LG 912
Power Cord C13/6-15P 0.0m black CA ASSY 904 / 918
Australia
Europe
Switzerland
Denmark
North America (250#V)
Japan
8120-6800
8120-8390
8120-8389
8120-8376
8121-0668
8120-6514
Power Cord OPT-919 3-COND 2.3-M-LG 919
Power Cord C15/CEI 23-16 2.5m black CA ASSY 920
Power Cord C15/CEI 23-16 2.5m black CA ASSY 921
Power Cord C13/GB-1002 2.236m gray CA ASSY 922
Power Cord OPT-927 3-COND 2.3-M-LG FLNT 927
C13/C14 Jumper cord
Israel
Argentina
Chile
China
South America
All
Circuit Breaker
The marked electrical size for the server is eight amps. The recommended circuit breaker size is 12 amps per
line cord (2 maximum) for North America. For countries outside North America, consult the local electrical
authority that has jurisdiction for the recommended circuit breaker size.
System Power Specifications
The following tables provide information to help determine the amount of ac power needed for your computer
room.
47
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Table 2-4
System Power Specifications
Specification
Value
Nominal input voltage
200 – 240 VAC
180 VAC
Minimum operating voltage
Maximum operating voltage
264 VAC
Frequency range (minimum –
maximum)
50 – 60 Hz
Number of phases
1
Maximum input current
8 A RMS
Maximum inrush current
(maximum configuration)
rp4410
100 A (peak), 55 A (average) 0 msec – 1 msec
55 A (peak), 33 A (average) 1 msec – 2 msec
5 A (peak), 22 A (average) 2 msec – 10 sec
25 A (peak), 15 A (average) 10 msec – 150 msec
rp4440
100 A (peak), 55 A (average) 0 msec – 1 msec
55 A (peak), 33 A (average) 1 msec – 2 msec
5 A (peak), 22 A (average) 2 msec – 10 sec
25 A (peak), 15 A (average) 10 msec – 150 msec
Dropout carry through time at
minimum line voltage
20 ms
Power factor correction
>0.95 at all loads of 90% – 100% of supply rating
>0.75 at all loads of 50% – 90% of supply rating
Ground leakage current
<1.1 mA per line cord
48
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Table 2-5 list maximum and typical power requirements for the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Table 2-5
System Power Requirements
Power Required (50-60 Hz)
Watts
1368
VA
1440
Comments
Maximum theoretical
Maximum configurationa
Typical configurationb
1065
1125
Typical
a. Maximum power is the sum of the worst case power consumption values of every subsystem in the
HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server. Use these values to calculate the worst case power consumption
for your facility installation.
b. Typical power consumption values were measured while running power intensive applications.
These values are generally lower than maximum power numbers because all the subsystems in the
server rarely draw maximum power simultaneously and for long durations.
Power and Cooling
Table 2-6 lists power and cooling values associated with servers which contain the listed components. These
power and cooling values are considered typical and not maximum for the configurations shown.
Table 2-6 lists the typical configuration power values for HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Table 2-6
Typical Configuration Power Values
PCI Cards
(assuming
10W each)
Hard
Disk
Drives
Bulk
Power
Supplies
Typical
Power
(Watts)
Typical
Cooling
(BTU/Hr)
CPU
Qty
Memory
Gigabytes
Core
I/O
DVDs
1
1 GB
0
0
1
2
2
410
1399.74
(4 DIMMs
256 MB each)
32 GBa
2
2
4
4
0
6
0
6
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
540
1843.56
(32 DIMMs
1 GB each)b
32 GBa
700
895
975
2389.80
3055.53
3328.65
(32 DIMMs
1 GB each)b
32 GBa
(32 DIMMs
1 GB each)b
32 GBa
(32 DIMMs
1 GB each)b
49
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Table 2-6
CPU
Typical Configuration Power Values (Continued)
PCI Cards
(assuming
10W each)
Hard
Disk
Drives
Bulk
Power
Supplies
Typical
Power
(Watts)
Typical
Cooling
(BTU/Hr)
Memory
Core
I/O
DVDs
Qty
Gigabytes
32 GBa
4
0
1
2
2
2
915
3121.98
(8 DIMMs
4 GB each)
128 GBa
4
6
1
2
2
2
3600
12283.2
(32 DIMMs
4 GB each)b
a. The maximum memory capacity is 128 GB.
b. These memory configurations require the optional 32-DIMM slot memory extender board. The
standard memory extender board has 16-DIMM slots.
Environmental Specifications
This section provides the temperature and humidity requirements, noise emission, and air flow specifications
for the server.
Operating Environment
The system is designed to run continuously and meet reliability goals in an ambient temperature of 5°C to
35°C (+40°F to +95°F) at sea level. The maximum allowable temperature is de-rated 1°C per 1,000 feet of
elevation above 5,000 feet above sea level up to 30°C at 10,000 feet. For optimum reliability and performance,
the recommended operating range is 20°C to 25°C and 40% – 55% relative humidity.
Ambient intake air temperature is often different from ambient room temperature; you should measure the
operating temperature and humidity directly in front of the cabinet cooling air intakes rather than just
checking ambient room conditions.
Environmental Temperature Sensor
The server includes internal sensors that monitor input air temperature and server operating temperatures.
The ambient air temperature is measured using a sensor placed on the system I/O board. Data from the
sensor is used to control the fan speed and to initiate system overtemperature shutdown.
Nonoperating Environment
The system is designed to withstand ambient temperatures between –40°C to 70°C under nonoperating
conditions.
50
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Cooling
This section provides information on the cooling systems in the server.
CPU and Memory Cooling
The server incorporates front to back airflow across the processor and memory extender boards and through
the HDD backplane. Two 127 mm dual fan assemblies, mounted vertically in the center of the chassis, pull air
through the processor and memory section and push air through the PCI section.
Each processor and memory dedicated dual fan assembly is controlled by smart fan control circuits embedded
in the system I/O board. The smart fan control circuit receives fan control input from the system fan
controller in the I/O board, and returns fan status information to the system fan controller. The smart fan
circuit controls the power and the pulse-width-modulated control signal to the fan and monitors the speed
indicator back from each of the fans. The fan status LED is driven by the smart fan circuit. The fan status
LED is located on the diagnostic board inside the system.
Bulk Power Supply Cooling
Cooling for the bulk power supplies is provided by one 120 mm dual fan assembly and one externally mounted
60 mm power supply fan. Air is pushed into both power supply bays by the 120 mm fan assembly and
exhausted out the rear by the 60 mm fan (one per power supply).
Air flows out of the rear of the chassis with minimal leakage into the cell airflow plenum.
NOTE
A power supply filler is required in the unused power supply slot to maintain proper airflow
throughout the system.
PCI and Mass Storage Section Cooling
Two dual fan assemblies located at the center of the chassis provide airflow for all the PCI slots. Airflow is
over the processor and memory extender boards and into the PCI section. The fans are controlled by the
system temperature and run at the speed necessary to maintain proper internal temperature throughout the
chassis.
The air is pulled through openings in the front cover and the mass storage devices and pushed through the
PCI card cage.
Perforation is provided between and above the PCI card cage to enable proper exhaust ventilation to maintain
the required temperature rating of the PCI cards.
CAUTION
For maximum cooling effects, ensure that the chassis ventilation holes are not blocked or
covered after installation.
51
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Figure 2-1
Airflow Through HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Servers
Acoustic Noise Specification
The acoustic noise specification for the HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server is 53 db LpA (sound pressure level at
bystander position in a dedicated computer room environment temperature of <25°C).
52
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Physical and Environmental Specifications
Physical and Environmental Specifications
Table 2-7 provides temperature and airflow information for minimum, typical, and maximum configurations
for the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440servers. It also lists the server and rack weights and dimensions.
Table 2-7
Physical and Environmental Specifications
Condition
Overall Server
(W x D x H)
Weight
Typical
Heat
Release
Airflow, at
Maximum
Ambient
Airflow, Nominal
a
180-264
VAC
degrees C
Server
Alone
Pede-
stal
Pede-
Rack
Rack
stal
Min.
Config.
410 Watts
1368 Watts
1065 Watts
W: 19 in
W: 10.3 in
(26.1 cm)
D: 27.4 in
(69.5 cm)
H: 20.9 in
(53.0 cm)
175
CFM
297
250
CFM
425
88 lbs
(40 kg)
100 lbs
(45.4 kg)
115 lbs
(53 kg)
(48.2 cm)
D: 27.2 in
(69.0 cm)
H: 6.8 in
(17.3 cm)
Max.
Config.
3
3
m /hr
m /hr
Typical
Config.
ASHRAE
Class 1
Min./
Config.
Airflow cooling scheme (front to
rear)
One CPU, one power supply, 1 GB DIMM, zero
DVD, one HDD, zero PCI cards, one core I/O.
Max.
Config.
Four CPUs, two power supplies, 128 GB DIMM,
one DVD, two HDD, six PCI cards, two core I/O.
Typical
Config.
Two CPUs, two power supplies, 16 GM DIMM,
one DVD, two HDD, two PCI cards, one core I/O.
a. Derate maximum dry bulb temperature 1 degree per 300 meters above 900 meters.
53
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Specifications
Physical and Environmental Specifications
54
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Installing the System
This chapter provides information on how to install the system.
This chapter addresses the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduction
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers are 1P/1C, 1P/2C, 2P/2C, 3P/2C, or 4P/2C servers based on the
PA-RISC processor family architecture. The server accommodates up to 32 DIMMs and internal peripherals
including hard disks and a DVD drive. Its high availability features include hot-swappable fans,
hot-swappable power supplies, hot-pluggable disk drives, and hot-pluggable PCI-X cards. The supported
operating system is HP-UX 11i v1 (and higher HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems).
55
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Server Views
Server Views
Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2, and Figure 3-3 show the top, front, and rear views of the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers.
Figure 3-1
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Servers (Top View)
56
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Detailed Server Description
Figure 3-2
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Servers with Bezel Removed (Front View)
Figure 3-3
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 Servers (Rear View)
Detailed Server Description
The following sections list information on the main subsystems within the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers.
I/O Subsystem
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
PCI-X slots available - 8.
— Two dedicated PCI slots: Slot 1 is for SCSI; slot 2 is for LAN.
— Four hot-pluggable PCI-X 66 MHz 64-bit 3.3V 25W slots with shared busses and I/O. Slots 3 and 4
share capabilities and slots 5 and 6 share capabilities.
— Two hot-pluggable PCI-X 133 MHz 64-bit 3.3V 15W slots dedicated for core I/O.
57
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Detailed Server Description
•
•
•
I/O bandwidth - 4 GBs.
Pinnacle FXe PCI video card.
PCI Gigabit, Fast Ethernet Controller with Wake-on-LAN enabled/disabled with BIOS setup.
Internal Core I/O
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
Dual channel SCSI U320 or U160 (PA8800 only) interface or RAID, two internal 68-pin connectors, two
68-pin external connectors.
•
•
•
•
SCSI backplane configured as either one or two channels.
One internal Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) connector for a slimline optical device (CD and DVD).
No floppy connector.
Optional dual channel U320 RAID controller, two internal 68-pin connectors, two 68-pin external
connectors (replaces SCSI interface).
External Core I/O
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Three external serial ports.
Two external USB ports.
Two SCSI U320 or U160 68-pin connectors (U160 for PA8800 only).
One or two 10/100/1000Base-T ethernet LAN connectors for copper cable.
Two USB 2.0 ports.
Three DB-9 ports (console, UPS, and modem).
Optional dual channel U320 RAID controller, two 68-pin external connectors (replaces SCSI interface).
Processors
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
•
800 MHz/1.5 GB cache or 1 GHz/1.5 GB cache per CPU.
Both processors are available with 32 MB or 64 MB L2 cache per dual processor module.
HP 9000 rp4410 server can have one processor or both processors of a single dual processor module
enabled, or two processors enabled in each of two dual processor modules.
•
HP 9000 rp4440 server can be 1P/2C, 2P/2C, 3P/2C, or 4P/2C.
Memory
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
•
•
16 DIMM slots on standard memory extender board.
32 DIMM slots on optional memory extender board.
Maximum memory size of 128 GB (4 GB DIMMs on 32-slot memory extender board).
Supports up to 32 Double Data Rate (DDR) registered ECC memory, in PC2100 DIMMs.
58
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Detailed Server Description
•
Supported DDR DIMM sizes:
— 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB
— Standard 184 pins 2.5V DDR266, CL2, registered, ECC
•
•
•
133 MHz memory bus frequency, 266 MTransfers/s data, 8.5 GB/s peak data bandwidth.
DIMMs loaded by quads enable interleaved mode and chip spare.
Requires that DIMMs within each group of four (quad) be identical.
Cooling
Six cooling fans with N+1 redundancy.
Power Supply Unit
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
One 1200 W hot-swappable power supply.
Optional second 1200 W hot-swappable power supply for N+1 redundancy.
Front Display Panel, DVD, and Diagnostic Panel
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
•
•
•
Front panel that provides the controls and indicators commonly used for operation.
DVD+RW drive (with CD-write capability); IDE interface; 48x speed.
Optional slimline DVD drive.
Power button and LED indicators for system status.
LED-based diagnostic panel.
Mass Storage
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers:
•
•
Up to two SCSI hot-pluggable hard disk drives.
Integrated Ultra-3 SCSI dual channel controller; 80 MB/s transfer rate with two 68-pin connectors. The
SCSI backplane is configured as either one or two channels.
•
•
Maximum internal storage of two 73 MB, 15K drives.
Optional integrated HP RAID controller.
Firmware
Firmware consists of many individually linked binary images that are bound together by a single framework
at run time. Internally, the firmware employs a software database called a device tree to represent the
structure of the hardware platform and to provide a means of associating software elements with hardware
functionality.
59
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Safety Information
The firmware incorporates the Boot Console Handler (BCH), which provides an interface between the
operating system and the platform firmware. BCH uses data tables that contain platform-related
information, and boot and run-time service calls available to the operating system and its loader to provide a
standard environment for booting.
The firmware supports the HP-UX 11i version 1 (and higher HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems)
operating system through the HP 9000 processor family standards and extensions, and has no operating
system-specific functionality included. The operating system is presented with the same interface to system
firmware, and all features are available to the operating system.
Event IDs for Errors and Events
The server firmware generates event IDs similar to chassis codes for errors, events, and forward progress to
the Integrity Integrated Light-Out Management Processor (iLO MP) through common shared memory. The
Integrity iLO MP interprets and stores event IDs. Reviewing these events helps you diagnose and
troubleshoot problems with the server.
Dimensions and Values
Table 3-1 lists the dimensions and their values of the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Table 3-1
Server Dimensions and Values
Dimension
Value
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
6.8 in (17.3 cm)
19 in (48.2 cm)
27.2 in (69.0 cm)
Unloaded 88 lb (40 kg)
Fully loaded 100 lb (45.4 kg)
Safety Information
Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing removal and replacement procedures.
Voltages might be present within the server. Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic
discharge.
Follow the safety conventions listed below to ensure safe handling of components, to prevent injury, and to
prevent damage to the server:
•
•
When removing or installing any server component, follow the instructions provided in this guide.
If installing a hot-swappable or hot-pluggable component when power is applied (fans are running),
reinstall the server cover immediately to prevent overheating.
•
•
If installing a hot-pluggable component, complete the required software intervention before removing the
component.
If installing an assembly that is neither hot-swappable nor hot-pluggable, disconnect the power cable
from the external server power receptacle before proceeding.
60
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installation Sequence and Checklist
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from
the server before removing or installing server hardware unless you are removing or
installing a hot-swappable or hot-pluggable component.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever a dc power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is
turned off.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
•
•
•
Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other items.
Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build up, such as wool or synthetic materials.
If installing an internal assembly, wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat, such as those
included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-1609).
•
Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or
any electrical components on accessory boards.
Installation Sequence and Checklist
Table 3-2
Installation Sequence Checklist
Step
Description
Completed
1
Unpack and inspect the server shipping container. Inventory the contents using
the packing slip.
2
Install additional components shipped with the server.
Install the server into a rack or pedestal mount.
Connect cables to the server.
Connect dc input power cable.
4Connect LAN core I/O cable.
Set up the console.
3
4
4a
4b
5
6
Power on the server.
7
Access the console.
8
Boot the operating system.
9
Verify the server configuration.
61
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Unpacking and Inspecting the Server
Unpacking and Inspecting the Server
This section describes procedures you perform before installation. Ensure that you have adequately prepared
your environment for the new server, received the components that you ordered, and verified that the server
and its containers are in good condition after shipment.
Verifying Site Preparation
Verifying site preparation is essential for a successful server installation and includes the following tasks.
Step 1. Gather LAN information and determine the two separate IP addresses for the Integrity iLO MP
LAN and the system LAN.
Step 2. Establish a method to connect to the server console.
Step 3. Verify electrical requirements and ensure that grounding specifications and power requirements
are met.
Step 4. Validate server physical space requirements.
Step 5. Confirm environmental requirements.
Inspecting the Shipping Containers for Damage
HP shipping containers protect their contents under normal shipping conditions. After the equipment arrives,
carefully inspect each carton for signs of shipping damage. Shipping damage constitutes moderate to severe
damage, such as punctures in the corrugated carton, crushed boxes, or large dents. Normal wear or slight
damage to the carton is not considered shipping damage. If you find shipping damage to the carton, contact
your HP customer service representative immediately.
Unpacking the Server
To unpack a nonracked server, follow these steps.
NOTE
HP recommends the use of a lifter, such as a RonI Company model 17000 SP 400 lifting device,
when moving a nonracked system.
Step 1. Use the instructions printed on the outside top flap of the carton; remove the banding and the outer
carton from the server pallet.
Step 2. Remove all inner accessory cartons and the top foam cushions, leaving only the server.
IMPORTANT Inspect each carton for shipping damage as you unpack the server.
Checking the Inventory
The sales order packing slip lists all of the equipment shipped from HP. Use this packing slip to verify that all
of the equipment has arrived.
62
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
NOTE
To identify each item by part number, see the sales order packing slip.
Returning Damaged Equipment
If the equipment is damaged, contact your HP customer service representative immediately. The service
representative initiates appropriate action through the transport carrier or the factory and assists you in
returning the equipment.
Unloading the Server with a Lifter
WARNING
Use caution when using a lifter. Because of the weight of the server, you must center
the server on the lifter forks before lifting it off the pallet to avoid injury.
To unload the server from the pallet using a lifter, follow these steps:
Step 2. Unroll the bottom corrugated tray corresponding to the side on which the lifter will be placed, and
slide the server as close to that edge of the pallet as possible.
Step 3. Break off any foam packaging that can prevent the lifter from being fully inserted under the server.
IMPORTANT Do not remove the foam packaging from the corners of the server. This foam is
required to elevate the server and enable the forks of the lifter to be placed under the
server.
Step 4. Insert the lifter forks under the server.
Step 5. Carefully roll the lifter forward until it is fully positioned against the side of the server.
Step 6. Slowly raise the server off the pallet until it clears the pallet cushions.
Step 7. Carefully roll the lifter and server away from the pallet. Do not raise the server any higher than
necessary when moving it over to the rack.
Installing Additional Components
This section describes how to install server components that are not installed before delivery.
Service Tools Required
Service of this product can require one or more of the following tools:
•
•
Electrically Conductive Field Service Kit (HP part number 9300-1155)
1/4 inch flat blade screwdriver
63
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
•
•
ACX-15 Torx screwdriver
Special processor tool kit (HP part number 5069-5441)
Accessing a Rack-Mounted Server
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers are designed to be rack mounted. The following procedure explains
how to gain access to a server that is mounted in an approved rack.
WARNING
Ensure that all antitip features are employed before extending the server (front and
rear antitip feet installed; adequate ballast properly placed, and so on).
Extend the Server from the Rack
NOTE
Ensure that there is enough area (approximately 1.5 meters [4.5 ft]) to fully extend the server
out the front and work on it.
To extend the server from the rack, follow these steps:
Step 1. Remove the 25-mm Torx screws that fasten the server to the rack.
Step 2. Flip out the two pull handles at either end of the front bezel and slowly pull the unit forward by the
handles. The server is fully extended when the rail clips are locked in place. After the server is fully
extended, the front and top covers are accessible.
Figure 3-4 shows the location of the 25-mm Torx screws.
64
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-4
Accessing T-25 Screws
T-25 Screw
Inserting the Server Into the Rack
To insert the server into the rack, follow these steps:
Step 1. Press the rail clips on either side of the server inward and push the server into the rack until it
stops.
Step 2. Replace the T-25 screws that fasten the server to the rack.
Accessing a Pedestal-Mounted Server
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers are also designed to be mounted in a pedestal (rackless). You do not
need to remove the pedestal from the server to gain access to internal components. The front bezel, front
cover, and top cover can be removed with the pedestal attached to the server.
WARNING
Ensure that the server is properly grounded when performing remove and replace
procedures. Use an antistatic wrist strap and grounding mat similar to those found
in the HP Electrically Conductive Field Service Kit.
65
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-8
Control Panel
System LED
Power LED
Power Button
Disk LED
TOC/NMI Button
Thermal LED
Locator
Button/LED
Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 list the control panel LED and the switch and button LED status and descriptions.
Table 3-3 Control Panel LED Definitions
LED/ Button
State
Flash Rate
Color
Green
Description
System LED
System LED
Running
Booting
Steady
System normal; OS up and running.
OS booting or at BCH.
Flashing at
0.5 Hz
Green
System LED
System LED
Attention
Fault
Flashing at
1 Hz
Yellow
Warning—System needs attention.
Redundancy lost, component failure
pending.
Flashing at
2 Hz
Red
Hard fault. System halted.
System LED
Power LED
Power LED
Off
On
On
Off
N/A
System off.
Steady
Green
Yellow
Power normal.
Flashing at
1 Hz
Housekeeping voltage present.
Power LED
Disk LED
Off
Off
Off
Power off.
Flashing at
rate of disk
activity
Green
Disk activity.
Thermal LED
Thermal LED
OK
Steady
Green
Yellow
Thermal OK.
Warning
Flashing at
1 Hz
Thermal warning.
Locator Button/LED
Flashing at
1 Hz
Blue
System locator LED can be remotely
or locally activated and deactivated.
68
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Table 3-4
Switch and Button LED Definitions
Description
Button
Power Button
Controls the power supply (turns system power on or off) if power is available to the
power supply. (Controls both power supplies if two are installed).
If power is off but power is available to the power supplies, pressing the power
button does the following:
•
Momentarily (less than one second) turns on the power supplies and applies
power to server circuits.
•
More than one second then released, has no effect.
If power is on and the system is at initial system loader, pressing the power button:
•
•
Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect.
More than one second, but less than five seconds—do not use. This initiates
e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers.
•
More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.
If power is on and the system is at BCH, pressing the power button does the
following:
•
•
Momentarily (less than one second) causes a immediate and hard power down.
More than one second, but less than five seconds—do not use. This initiates
e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers.
•
More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.
If power is on but the OS has been shut down, pressing the power button:
•
•
Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect.
More than one second, but less than five seconds—do not use. This initiates
e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers.
•
More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.
If the OS is running, pressing the power button does the following:
•
•
Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect.
More than one second, but less than five seconds—do not use. This initiates
e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440
servers.
•
More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.
NMI Button
Use a paper clip to press this button. Press the non-maskable interrupt (NMI)
button before restarting the system after the system hangs. NMI provides crash
dump capture capability. Obtain a system hardware status dump to use in root
cause analysis and debugging.a
a. The same function is available with the iLO MP CM>TC command.
69
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Additional Controls and Indicators
Storage devices have additional LEDs showing their status.
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive Indicators
The hot-pluggable disk drives have two LEDs per drive, as follows:
Figure 3-9
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Indicators
Status LED
Activity LED
Table 3-5
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Definitions
LED
State
Description
Activity LED
Flashing green
Drive is active. The drive activity LED is green and
indicates disk drive activity. This LED is controlled by the
disk drive directly and turns on when a drive is accessed.
Status LED
Green
Drive is operating. The drive status LED is green when
power is applied to drive circuits.
DVD, DVD-R, and DVD-RW Drives
The server is delivered with one DVD drive (DVD-R and DVD-RW optional). Each of these devices has one
activity LED.
70
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-10
DVD or CD-RW/DVD LED Indicators
Activity LED
Eject Button
Emergency Eject
Table 3-6
DVD Drive LED Definitions
State
LED
Description
Activity LED
Flashing green
Drive is active
Front Bezel
The server does not need to be powered off to remove the front bezel.
Removing the Front Bezel
To remove the front bezel, grasp the front bezel at the outer edges and pull straight out.
Figure 3-11
Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel
71
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
The front control panel access door is on the bezel. Opening the control panel door provides access to the
following components:
•
•
Power button
System LEDs
Replacing the Front Bezel
To replace the front bezel, hold the bezel in mounting position and push the bezel straight into the chassis
until it snaps into place.
Front and Top Covers
CAUTION
Do not operate the server without the front and top covers in place. Operation of the server
without the front and top covers in place makes the server susceptible to electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and overheating problems that result in system failure.
Observe all electrostatic discharge (ESD) safety precautions before attempting this procedure.
Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
NOTE
When the front or top cover is removed, the chassis fan units increase to high speed to assist
cooling. When the top cover is replaced at the end of the operation, the chassis fans return to
normal speed.
Removing the Front Cover
CAUTION
Power the server off before removing the front cover. All components accessible behind the front
cover are cold-swappable and require power to be off.
To remove the front cover, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 3. Loosen the four captive thumbscrews that hold the front cover in place.
72
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-12 Removing and Replacing the Front Cover
Thumbscrews
Step 4. Raise the cover slightly, and pull the cover toward the front of the server to free the tabs from the
slots in the center of the chassis.
Replacing the Front Cover
To replace the front cover, follow these steps:
Step 1. Align the tabs at the rear of the front cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis and fully
seat the tabs into the slots.
Step 2. Tighten the four thumbscrews securely.
Removing the Top Cover
To remove the top cover, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 2. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews that hold the top cover in place.
Step 3. Pull the cover toward the rear of the server to free the tabs from the slots in the center of the
chassis and lift the cover straight up.
73
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-13
Removing and Replacing the Top Cover
Thumbscrews
Rear of Chassis
Replacing the Top Cover
To replace the top cover, follow these steps:
Step 1. Align the tabs at the rear of the top cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis. Fully seat the
tabs into the slots and push forward until it seats.
Step 2. Tighten the two thumbscrews securely.
74
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Units
There are three hot-swappable chassis fan units in the server.
•
•
Fan units 0, 1, and 2 are in the center of the chassis, spanning the full chassis width.
Fan units 0 and 1 are interchangeable and are in the left and center positions.
Figure 3-14 Hot-Swappable I/O Fans (Units 0 and 1)
•
Fan unit 2 is smaller and fits into the right-most position behind the power supply. Fan unit 2 cannot be
installed in the left or center positions.
75
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-15 Hot-Swappable Power Supply Fan (Unit 2)
CAUTION
NOTE
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
A hot-swappable device does not require interaction with the operating system before the
device is removed from or installed into the server.
The ac power to the server does not need to be off to remove or replace a hot-swappable chassis
fan unit.
Removing a Hot-Swappable Fan Unit
To remove an I/O or power supply fan unit, follow these steps:
76
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 3. Grasp the fan unit locking handle, tilt it up, and pull out the fan from the chassis. (Figure 3-15)
IMPORTANT When one fan unit is removed from the server, the remaining fan units operate at full
speed for two minutes. After two minutes a soft-shutdown of the server occurs.
Replacing a Hot-Swappable Fan Unit
To replace a hot-swappable I/O or power supply fan unit, follow these steps:
Step 1. Orient the fan unit by aligning the appropriate icon on the fan unit handle to the identical icon on
the chassis wall.
Step 2. Push the fan unit firmly into the housing and close the handle until flush to the top of the chassis.
The fan unit plugs into the power outlet on the system I/O board.
CAUTION
If the fan unit handle does not close completely, it is misaligned. Remove the fan unit
and check that the alignment icons are oriented correctly.
•
•
When the fan functions normally, the LED is off.
When the fan fails, the LED is lit.
I/O Baseboard Assembly
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing the I/O baseboard assembly.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure, contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
77
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Removing the I/O Baseboard Assembly
CAUTION
Before removing the I/O baseboard assembly, record all boot configuration settings displayed by
the BCH INFO ALLcommand. These values might need to be reset after replacing the I/O
baseboard assembly.
To remove the I/O baseboard assembly, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 4. Unplug all external cabling attached to the ports at the rear of the I/O chassis.
Step 5. Unplug the internal SCSI cables attached to the top of the host bus adapter (HBA) board in PCI
slot 1.
Step 6. Lift up on the locking lever attached to the side of the power supply cage to unplug the I/O
baseboard assembly from the socket on the midplane riser board.
78
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-16 I/O Baseboard Locking Lever
OPEN
CLOSE
Step 7. Slide the system I/O baseboard assembly all the way to the rear until removed from chassis.
CAUTION
The I/O baseboard assembly is large. Be careful when lifting it out of the server
chassis.
79
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-17
I/O Baseboard Assembly Removal
Replacing the I/O Baseboard Assembly
NOTE
The I/O baseboard assembly replacement procedure assumes that you are reinstalling the
assembly that was previously removed from a configured server.
To replace the I/O baseboard assembly, follow these steps:
Step 1. Ensure that all fan modules are removed from the chassis before sliding in the I/O baseboard
assembly or the fans and the I/O baseboard can be damaged
Step 2. Align the I/O baseboard assembly rails with the chassis slots and slide the assembly into the
chassis until it stops against the midplane riser board socket. Ensure the I/O baseboard locking
lever is in the up position to engage correctly with the midplane riser board socket.
CAUTION
The I/O baseboard assembly is large. Use care when sliding it into the server chassis.
Step 3. With the I/O baseboard flush against the midplane riser board socket, push down firmly on the
locking lever until the I/O baseboard plugs all the way into the midplane riser board socket and the
locking lever clicks into place on the chassis wall. (Figure 3-16)
Step 5. Plug all external cabling into the ports at the rear of the chassis.
Step 6. Plug the internal SCSI cables into the HBA board in PCI slot 1.
80
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
System Battery
This section provides information on the system battery and how to replace a system battery.
Battery Notice
This product contains a Lithium battery.
WARNING
Lithium batteries can explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, or
dispose of lithium batteries in a fire. Failure to observe this warning can result in
personal injury or damage to equipment.
Replace with the identical or equivalent battery. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. Dispose of used
batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Replacing the System Battery
CAUTION
Before replacing the system battery, record all boot configuration settings listed by the BCH
INFO ALLcommand. These values must be reset after replacing a battery.
To remove and replace the system battery, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 3. Remove the I/O baseboard assembly from the chassis. (See “Removing the I/O Baseboard Assembly”
Step 4. Locate the system battery on the I/O baseboard.
81
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-18 System Battery Location on I/O Baseboard
Battery
Step 5. Lift up the battery holder retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and push on the back of the
battery to remove the battery from its socket.
Step 6. Lift up the battery holder retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and slide the new battery into
the holder.
NOTE
The positive terminal of the battery is designated by the plus (+) sign. The battery is
installed with the plus (+) sign facing up.
Step 7. Replace the I/O baseboard assembly. (See “Replacing the I/O Baseboard Assembly” on page 80.)
82
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Step 9. Reset the system time and date using the BCH DATEcommand.
To verify that you installed the system battery correctly once you set the time and date, follow these
steps:
a. Power off the system.
b. Unplug the power cord.
c. Wait for a minute before turning it back on.
d. Run the DATEcommand again. If the time and date are now correct, you installed the system
battery correctly.
Installing Power Supplies and Disk Drives
This section provides information about installing hot-swappable power supplies and hot-pluggable disk
drives. Hot-swappable power supplies are located at the rear of the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers, and
hot-pluggable disk drives are located behind the front bezels.
CAUTION
A hot-pluggable device can require interaction with the operating system before the device is
safely installed into the server. Verify that the operating system supports installing disk drives
while the operating system is running. If the operating system does not support this feature,
shut down the operating system before attempting this procedure. Failure to observe this
caution results in system failure. For more information on hot-pluggable procedures. See
NOTE
A hot-swappable device does not require interaction with the operating system before the
device is removed from or installed into the server.
The ac power to the server does not need to be off to install a hot-swappable power supply.
Installing Hot-Swappable Power Supplies
This section provides instructions on how to install power supplies.
Power Supply Load Order
The supported configuration of an HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server requires a minimum of one power supply.
You can install a second, optional hot-swappable power supply, to provide N+1 capability.
The left side (viewing from the rear) hot-swappable power supply is identified as P0, and the second
hot-swappable power supply is identified as P1. Each hot-swappable power supply requires a separate power
cord, installed in the appropriate power cord receptacle and attached to a power cord support bracket.
WARNING
Be careful when installing a hot-swappable power supply. It is heavier than it
appears.
83
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
CAUTION
CAUTION
The empty hot-swappable power supply slot P1 must remain closed with the supplied metal
cover in place when a second power supply is not used. The server can be damaged due to
overheating if the cover does not remain in place.
If the system is powered off, install the hot-swappable power supply into the server before
attaching the new power cord at the rear of the system. Failure to observe this caution results
in damage to the server.
To install a hot-swappable power supply, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 2. Remove the cable management arm from the rack slide nearest the power supplies. The cable
management arm does not need to be completely removed, but moved just enough to enable access
to the power supplies.
Step 3. Remove the metal cover from slot P1. Grasp the metal cover and pull straight out.
Figure 3-19 Metal Cover in Unused Slot P1
84
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Step 4. Supporting the power supply with both hands, slide it into slot P1 until it plugs into the socket on
the internal power supply board. Hand tighten the thumbscrew.
Step 5. Install the power cord into the power supply socket and secure it to the power cord bracket.
Step 6. Apply power (200 - 240 VAC) to the new power supply. The LED immediately turns on.
Installing Hot-Pluggable Disk Drives
One additional hot-pluggable disk drive can be added to the server in slot 2. Always use low profile disk drives
(1 inch height) in the server.
To install a hot-pluggable disk drive, follow these steps:
Step 1. Remove the volume filler from slot 2.
Figure 3-20 Volume Filler Installation in Slot 2
NOTE
For cooling purposes, always leave the volume filler in slot 2 if you do not use a
second disk drive.
Step 2. Slide the hot-pluggable disk drive into slot 2 until it is seated.
85
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-21 Disk Drive Installation in Slot 2
Step 3. Close the drive ejector handle by pushing it down until it clicks. The hot-pluggable disk drive is now
correctly installed.
Figure 3-22 Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2
Slot 2—SCSI ID 1
Slot 1—SCSI ID 0
Installing Processors
This section provides information about installing processors.
WARNING
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
86
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before attempting the following procedures.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Ensure that processor speed and cache size are identical for all processors. Failure to observe
this caution results in performance degradation or system failure.
The easiest way to ensure compatibility is by using dual processor modules with identical part
numbers.
The processor extender board can be used in PA-RISC or Itanium processor based systems. A
dipswitch is provided to configure processor extender board circuits. Ensure that the
PA-RISC/Itanium dipswitch is set to PA-RISC for the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers. If
this switch is incorrectly set, the system does not enter into self test.
Required Tools
To install processors in the server, use the CPU Install Kit (HP part number 5069-5441). This kit consists of
the following:
•
•
Disposable ESD Kit (HP part number A3024-80004)
CPU Install Tool (HP part number A7231-04046)
Dual Processor Modules
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers use dual processor modules. Each module contains two processors. When
only one processor is activated (a 1P/1C configuration of the HP 9000 rp4410 server), the second processor is
installed but not enabled and is available for future use.
•
The HP 9000 rp4410 server can contain one or two dual processor modules to provide 1P/1C, 1P/2C, or
2P/2C configurations.
•
The HP 9000 rp4440 server can contain one, two, three, or four dual processor modules to provide 1P/2C,
2P/2C, 3P/2C, or 4P/2C configurations.
If you are installing fewer than the maximum number of dual processor modules, the modules must be
installed in the appropriate connectors. See Table 3-7.
Processor Load Order
You can install up to four dual processor modules on the processor extender board, which is located under the
front cover in the top service bay, directly under the memory extender board. If you are installing fewer than
the maximum number of dual processor modules (one in the rp4410 server or fewer than four in the rp4440
server), they must be installed in the designated locations on the processor extender board.
The connectors (slots or sockets) on the processor extender board are labeled CPU0 through CPU3. CPU0 and
CPU1 connectors are located on the top of the processor extender board, and CPU2 and CPU3 connectors are
located on the bottom.
87
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Table 3-7 lists the load sequence.
Table 3-7
Dual Processor Module Load Order
Dual Processor
Module
Server
Connector
rp4410 or
rp4440
1
2
CPU0
CPU1
rp4410 or
rp4440
rp4440 only
rp4440 only
3
4
CPU2
CPU3
Removing the Processor Extender Board
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing the processor extender board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
To remove the processor extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 4. Press the latch on each extraction lever located on each side of the processor extender board.
88
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-23 Extender Board Latches
Step 5. Pull out on the extraction levers to unplug the processor extender board from the socket located on
the midplane riser board.
Step 6. Pull out the processor extender board from the chassis.
89
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-24 Removing the Processor Extender Board
CPU1
CPU0
CPU3 (under)
CPU2 (under)
Installing a Processor on the Extender Board
CAUTION
NOTE
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Before installing a processor into the server, read the following instructions carefully for a
complete understanding of this process.
To install a processor on the extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Locate the socket (CPU1, CPU2, or CPU3) where you will install the dual processor module. (See
Step 2. Ensure that the cam on the processor socket lock is in the unlocked, counterclockwise position.
Step 3. Remove any protective packaging from the processor module.
NOTE
Protective covers can be installed to protect connector pins. These covers can be
saved for future use.
Step 4. Inspect the pins of the processor to be installed. Verify that the processor pins are not bent.
90
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Step 5. Carefully lower the processor, without the sequencer frame, onto the processor socket. Align the
pins on the bottom of the heatsink to the slots in the retention frame on the extender board.
CAUTION
TIP
Do not press the processor modules into the socket. When properly assigned, the
processor pins seat into the socket by themselves. You can damage the pins if you
apply pressure.
Test the alignment of the assembly to the socket by gently moving the assembly back
and forth with the palm of your hand—you should feel little or no side play. However,
because the assembly is not yet tightened, it can tilt slightly toward the center of the
extender board; this is acceptable.
CAUTION
Before locking the processor assembly into its socket, ensure that the power cable is
not pinched between the heatsink and sheet metal frame of the extender board. Also,
ensure that the two power cable ends attached to the dual processor module do not
come unplugged from their sockets when you move the cable into place under the
Figure 3-25 Processor Cable Placed Correctly
Heatsink
Cable Placed Correctly
Under Heatsink
Protective Plastic Sleeve
Sheet Metal Frame
91
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-26 Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly
Heatsink
Cable Placed Incorrectly -
Pinched Between Heatsink and
Extender Board Frame
Protective Plastic Sleeve
Sheet Metal Frame
Step 6. Lock the assembly to the socket by rotating the cam on the socket 180 degrees clockwise using the
CPU Install Tool or 2.5-mm Allen wrench.
TIP
When rotating the locking cam, hold the palm of your hand on top of the assembly
and exert light pressure. This ensures that the assembly stays flush and level to the
socket while it is being tightened.
Step 7. Plug the processor cable into its socket on the extender board.
Step 8. Place the sequencer frame over the processor.
Step 9. Hand tighten the two knurled thumbscrews on the sequencer frame.
NOTE
Do not tighten the other four shoulder screws until you have first hand-tightened the
two knurled thumbscrews.
Step 10. Using a CPU Install Tool (Torx T15 driver), tighten the four remaining T15 shoulder screws until
IMPORTANT Do not overtighten the four shoulder screws. They can shear off if overtightened.
Stop tightening the shoulder screws when you feel them bottom out.
Step 11. Using the CPU Install Tool (Torx T15 driver), finish tightening the two thumbscrews.
IMPORTANT Do not overtighten the two thumbscrews. They can shear off if overtightened.
Tightening the thumbscrews by 1/4 turn tightens them sufficiently.
92
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-27
Installing the Processor on the Extender Board
Tightening Sequence for 4-Shoulder
Screws is 1, 2, 3, 4
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN (See Step 7)
3
2 Knurled
Thumb-
Screws
1
Torx-T15
2
Use Torx T15 Driver
to Tighten Shoulder
Screws and
4
Thumbscrews
2.5 MM Allen Key
Power Cable Protected by
Plastic Sleeve
Align Pins on
Heatsink with
Slots in
Frame
Slots*
Slots*
*Slots shown are at
CPU1 socket.
Processor shown is
being mounted on
socket CPU0 per load
order.
93
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Extender Board Switches and Jumpers
The processor extender board includes switches and jumpers. These switches are factory preset and must not
be altered except by an HP Service Representative.
Replacing the Processor Extender Board
To replace the processor extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Ensure that the extraction levers are positioned in the outward, unlocked position.
Step 2. Align the processor extender board with the left and right card guides.
Step 3. Slide the processor extender board in until it begins to seat in the socket located on the midplane
riser board.
Step 4. Push the extraction levers inward to the locked position in order to fully seat the processor extender
board into the midplane riser board socket.
Step 5. Replace the front cover and front bezel.
Step 6. Verify processor operation by using the system utilities.
•
•
Use the iLO MP commands and the BCH commands to verify operation.
Use MAKODIAGprovided by the offline diagnostic environment to exercise the processor.
Installing Memory
The standard configuration of HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers include a 16-DIMM memory extender
board. This extender board must contain a minimum of 1 GB of memory (four 256 MB DIMMs loaded in quad
An optional 32-DIMM memory extender board is available to replace the 16-DIMM memory extender board.
This extender board must contain a minimum of 1 GB of memory (four 256 MB DIMMs loaded in quad 0
[connectors 0A, 0B, 0C, and 0D]). (Figure 3-29)
You can insert additional DIMMs into both 16- and 32-DIMM boards. When adding DIMMs, you must use a
minimum of four like-sized DIMMs in the next available quad.
Supported DIMM Sizes
Up to 128 GB of memory can be installed in the server. Supported DIMM sizes are as follows:
•
256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB.
Dissimilar DIMM sizes can be used across the extender board, but all four DIMMs in each quad must match.
For cooling purposes, you must install DIMM fillers into unused connectors.
DIMM Slot Fillers
Both the 16- and 32-DIMM extender boards must have DIMM slot filler boards placed over all unfilled DIMM
connectors. As you fill DIMM quads with additional memory, you must remove the DIMM slot fillers covering
the connectors. All remaining DIMM fillers in unused connectors must remain in place to maximize internal
cooling.
NOTE
94
One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM connectors. Remove DIMM slot fillers as you
add memory and you will always retain the correct configuration.
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Table 3-8 and Figure 3-28 show the DIMM filler requirements and configuration for the 16-DIMM memory
extender board.
Table 3-8
DIMM Filler Requirements for 16-DIMM Extender Board
Fillers Requireda
DIMMs Loaded
4 DIMMs in quad 0
Six fillers total:
Two fillers each in quads 1, 2, and 3
8 DIMMs in quads 0 and 1
Four fillers total:
Two fillers in quads 2 and 3
Two fillers total:
12 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, and 2
16 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, and 3
Two fillers in quad 3
No fillers required
a. One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM connectors.
Figure 3-28 16-DIMM Memory Extender Board Minimum Configuration
DIMM Filler
Table 3-9 and Figure 3-29 show the DIMM filler requirements and configuration for the 32-DIMM memory
extender board.
Table 3-9
DIMM Filler Requirements for 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board
Fillers requireda
DIMMs Loaded
95
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Table 3-9
DIMM Filler Requirements for 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board
4 DIMMs in quad 0
12 fillers total:
Two fillers in quads 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7
(quad 2 remains unfilled)
Eight fillers total:
8 DIMMs in quads 0 and 1
Two fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and7
(quads 2 and 3 remain unfilled)
Eight fillers total:
12 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, and 2
16 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, and 3
20 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4
Two fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and7
(quad 3 remains unfilled)
Eight fillers total:
Two fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and7
(all quads filled)
Four fillers total:
Two fillers in quads 5 and 7
(quad 6 remains unfilled)
No fillers required
No fillers required
No fillers required
24 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
28 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
32 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7
a. One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM connectors.
96
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Removing a Memory Extender Board
The memory extender boards is located under the front cover.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before attempting this procedure.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
To remove a memory extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 4. Press the latches on the extraction levers located on each side of the memory extender board.
Step 5. Pull on the extraction levers to unplug the memory extender board from the socket located on the
midplane riser board and remove the memory extender board from the chassis.
Figure 3-30 Removing the Memory Extender Board
98
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Installing DIMMs
To install DIMMs, follow these steps:
Step 1. Align the DIMM with the socket located on the memory extender board. (Align the notch in the
DIMM with the tab in the connector.)
Step 2. Firmly and evenly push on each end of the DIMM until it seats in the socket. Ensure that the
extraction levers are in the closed position.
Figure 3-31 Inserting DIMM Into the Extender Board Connector
Replacing the Memory Extender Board
To replace the memory extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Ensure that the extraction levers are in the outward, unlocked position.
Step 2. Align the memory extender board with the left and right chassis guide slots.
Step 3. Slide the memory extender board in until it begins to seat in the socket located on the midplane
riser board.
Step 4. Push the extraction levers inward to the locked position to fully plug the memory extender board
into the midplane riser board.
99
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Hot-Pluggable PCI/PCI-X
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers support PCI/PCI-X hot-pluggable technology and includes six
hot-pluggable PCI/PCI-X slots.
Hot-Pluggable PCI/PCI-X Operations
PCI/PCI-X hot-pluggable technology enables the following operations. For procedures with step-by-step
instructions describing how to add, replace, delete, and locate PCI/PCI-X cards, see “Hot-Plug Procedures” on
•
Online Addition (OLA)
You can install new PCI/PCI-X expansion cards in empty slots without powering off the server.
Online Replacement (OLR)
•
You can replace a previously occupied slot with a new PCI/PCI-X expansion card by suspending the driver.
This operation combines removing an active card and replacing it with an equivalent card. The existing
driver for the old card must be compatible with the new card.
CAUTION
A special OLR requirement for HP-UX 11i v1 (and higher) is that the card to be replaced
must be exactly the same as the removed card. This is also called like-for-like replacement.
•
PCI/PCI-X Slot Locate (Locate)
To easily locate the PCI/PCI-X slot at which to perform a hot-pluggable operation, you can command the
attention LEDs on the OLX divider and the I/O baseboard to blink and act as visual cues to the active slot
location. This operation is always initiated through a software or web interface, and is optional to the
operating system on the server.
PCI/PCI-X Hardware and Software Interfaces
Table 3-10 shows what hot-pluggable hardware and software interfaces are available on HP-UX 11i v1 (and
higher).
Table 3-10
Hot-Pluggable Hardware and Software Interfaces and OS Availability
Hot-Pluggable PCI/PCI-X Interface
Supported
Hardware interface comprised of the following:
—Attention button (doorbell)
—Manual retention latch
—Power LED
Yes
—Attention LED
—PCI/PCI-X card latch
GUI
Yes
Command Line Interface (CLI)
System Administration Manager (SAM)
Yes (sam command). Performing hot-pluggable
operations in SAManager is preferred. For a
complete description of SAM, see the HP-UX
Reference Guide.
100
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
PCI/PCI-X Slot Locations and Configurations
Figure 3-32
Slot ID Numbering
PCI-X Bus 1
PCI-X Bus 2
PCI-X Bus 3
PCI-X Bus 4
PCI-X Bus 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PCI Slot ID Numbers
Amber Attention LEDs
Green Power LEDs
Amber Attention LEDs
Public I/O
Hot-pluggable PCI-X
Core I/O
PCI-X
The following describes configuration requirements for slots 1 through 8:
•
PCI slots 1 and 2 are dedicated for use by the core I/O cards: SCSI HBA card in slot 1 and Gigabit
Ethernet LAN card in slot 2. Slots 1 and 2 are not hot-pluggable. Additional PCI/PCI-X expansion
cards must not be placed in slots 1 or 2.
•
Slots 3 and 4 share a PCI bus, and slots 5 and 6 share a PCI bus. The maximum capability of each of the
shared slots is PCI/PCI-X 66 MHz. If a PCI/PCI-X 133 MHz card is placed in a shared slot, the PCI/PCI-X
133 MHz card runs at a maximum of 66 MHz. If different modes (PCI versus PCI-X) or slower speeds (33
MHz) are used, the slot automatically downgrades to accept the change.
101
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Shared slots have card compatibility restrictions. If one of the shared slots is occupied, the card being
added to the second slot is limited by the configuration of the occupied slot. If the new card has a slower
capability than the current bus configuration, it cannot work. If the new card has a faster capability than
the current bus configuration, it only runs at the bus mode and frequency of the current bus
configuration.
•
Slots 7 and 8 are single slots. The maximum capability of each slot is PCI/PCI-X 133 MHz. Only slots 7
and 8 allow 133 MHz, PCI/PCI-X cards to run at full speed. These two slots are not limited by bus-mode,
frequency-related incompatibilities.
Table 3-11 lists the PCI/PCI-X cards slot frequency and bus mode compatibility for shared slots.
Table 3-11
PCI/PCI-X Card Slot Frequency and Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared
Slots
a
Current PCI Bus Mode
and Frequency for the
Current Card in a
Shared Slot
Cards to be installed
PCI 66 MHz PCI-X 66 MHz
Compatibleb
PCI 33 MHz
PCI-X 133 MHz
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
PCI 33 MHz
PCI 66 MHz
PCI-X 66 MHz
New card running
at 33 MHz
New card running New card running
at 33 MHz
at 33 MHz
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Incompatible
frequencyc
New card running
at 66 MHz
New card running New card running
at 66 MHz
at 66 MHz
Incompatible busd
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Incompatible
frequencyc
New card running New card running
at 66 MHz
at 66 MHz
PCI-X 133 MHze
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Incompatible Incompatible
Running at PCI-X 66 MHz)
New card running New card running
at 66 MHz at 66 MHz
a. The conditions described in this table apply only to shared slots (slots 3 and 4 on bus number 2,
slots 5 and 6 on bus number 3). Slots 7 and 8 are not shared slots.
b. Compatible: card is accepted and runs at the frequency shown.
c. Incompatible frequency: card does not work.
d. Incompatible bus: Card does not work. The new card does not initialize powers off.
e. Maximum bus mode and frequency supported on shared slots is PCI-X 66 MHz.
102
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Hot-Plug Procedures
The hot-plug procedures described in this section use the hardware interface only. Software interface
IMPORTANT Before adding or replacing a PCI/PCI-X card, determine whether that card is critical to the
server operation. If you replace a card that is still operating and it is a critical resource to the
server, you can cause undesired system downtime.
OLA
Before installing a PCI/PCI-X card, ensure that the proper drivers for that PCI/PCI-X card are installed.
NOTE
If you are installing the Graphics Kit A6150B, use slots 3-8. However, DO NOT install the
included USB card. The server currently supports USB and the ports are already located on the
rear of the server.
If you are installing the RAID card A7143A, you must install it into slot 8. If you install this
card in any other slot, it interferes with the manual retention latch (MRL) on the OLX divider
in the next slot. Because of this interference, you can install only two RAID cards in the server
in slot 1 and slot 8.
To add a PCI/PCI-X card into an empty slot, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 3. Choose an empty slot and pull up on the MRL located on the OLX divider approximately 75
degrees. (Figure 3-33)
CAUTION
Do not pull up on the MRL of a powered on, occupied slot or the server will crash.
103
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-33 PCI/PCI-X OLX Divider Layout
PCI-X Card Latch
Closed Position
PCI-X Card Latch
Open Position
MRL—Closed
MRL—Open
Power LED
Light Pipe
Attention Button
Attention LED
Light Pipe
Step 4. Ensure that the MRL and the card latch on the OLX divider are already open and insert the
PCI/PCI-X card into the empty slot. (Figure 3-34)
IMPORTANT When inserting the PCI/PCI-X card, be careful you do not accidentally touch an
Attention button on the other OLX dividers. This initiates an undesired shutdown of
another PCI/PCI-X card/slot. If you accidentally initiate slot shutdown, push the
Attention button again within five seconds to cancel the shutdown.
NOTE
Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot, or undesired results can occur after
power is reapplied to the slot.
104
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-35 Slider Gate Latch
Step 6. If the PCI/PCI-X card is full size, close the slider gate latch to secure the end of the card.
Step 7. Push the MRL down until it seats against the chassis wall.
106
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Step 8. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch to the closed position to capture the PCI/PCI-X card and MRL into
the closed position.
Step 9. Press the Attention button . The power LED starts to blink. Wait until the power LED goes from
blinking to steady on.
NOTE
After pushing the Attention button, you have five seconds to cancel the operation by
pushing the Attention button again. After five seconds, pressing the Attention button
initiates slot power off for OLR of the card.
Step 11. Push the server all the way back into the rack until it stops.
OLR
CAUTION
For HP-UX 11i v1 (and higher), you must replace an existing card with an identical card.
To remove and replace a PCI/PCI-X card into a populated slot, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Extend the Server from the
Step 3. Disconnect all external and internal cables attached to the PCI card in the side service bay.
Step 4. Press the Attention button located on the OLX divider that controls the affected slot. The power
LED starts to blink. Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady off.
NOTE
After pushing the Attention button, you have five seconds to cancel the operation by
pushing the Attention button again.
Step 5. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch approximately 45 degrees on the chassis until the MRL is free to
pull up.
Step 7. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch on the chassis approximately 90 degrees to completely expose the
PCI/PCI-X bulkhead.
Step 8. If the PCI/PCI-X card is full size, open the slider gate latch to release the end of the card.
Step 9. Grasp the top edge of the PCI/PCI-X card and remove it from the slot.
NOTE
There is no ejection lever to remove PCI/PCI-X cards as on previous server models.
You must remove the PCI/PCI-X card manually. Cutouts in the OLX dividers enable
access for grasping PCI/PCI-X cards.
107
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
IMPORTANT When inserting the PCI/PCI-X card, be careful you do not accidentally touch an
Attention button on the other OLX dividers. This initiates an undesired shutdown of
another PCI/PCI-X card/slot. If you accidentally initiate slot shutdown, push the
Attention button again within five seconds to cancel the shutdown.
NOTE
Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot, or undesired results can occur after
power is reapplied to the slot.
Step 11. If the PCI/PCI-X card is full size, close the slider gate latch to secure the end of the card.
Step 12. Push the MRL down until it seats against the chassis wall.
Step 13. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch on the chassis to the closed position. This locks the PCI/PCI-X card
into its slot and the MRL into the closed position.
Step 14. Press the Attention button. The power LED starts to blink.
Step 15. Wait for the power LED to stop blinking. The PCI/PCI-X card is now active.
Step 16. Reconnect all cables.
Step 18. Push the server all the way back into the rack until it stops.
Understanding LEDs and Hardware Errors
Table 3-12 describes the hot-pluggable LED error conditions.
Table 3-12
Hot-Pluggable LED Descriptions
Power LED (Green)
Condition
On
Description
PCI/PCI-X slot is powered on
Blinking
Off
Hot-pluggable operation in progress. Do not touch the slot
PCI/PCI-X slot is powered off
Description
Attention LED (Amber) Condition
On
Hardware operational fault
NOTE: If the slot is powered on, it does not power off. If the
slot is powered off, it does not power on
Blinking
Off
Slot location is being indicated
If power to the slot is on, the slot is functioning normally
108
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Troubleshooting PCI/PCI-X Hot-Pluggable Operations
Sometimes a PCI/PCI-X card does not come online during a hot-pluggable operation due to a frequency
mismatch between the PCI/PCI-X card and the slot bus or due to other hardware errors. To determine the
type of error you are experiencing, observe the LED activity described as follows.
1. PCI/PCI-X Bus Mode or Frequency Mismatch
After you insert a PCI/PCI-X card into the slot and push the attention button, the power LED goes from
blinking to steady off and stays at steady off. The system firmware has rejected the PCI/PCI-X card and
indicates either bus-frequency or bus-mode mismatch.
After pushing the attention button, wait for the full five second operation cancellation window before
taking further action.
2. Hardware Operation Fault
If the PCI/PCI-X card cannot be powered on during a hot-pluggable addition operation, the attention LED
turns steady on and the power LED goes steady off.
3. Power draw is excessive
If the power draw for a newly installed PCI/PCI-X card is excessive (when combined with that of the
existing PCI/PCI-X expansion cards), the server powers off. If this occurs, check the power ratings of all
installed PCI/PCI-X cards. A known cause of power loss is the use of more than three PCI/PCI-X RAID
cards in the server.
If the PCI/PCI-X card cannot be powered off during a hot-pluggable removal operation, the attention
button turns steady on and the power LED remains steady on. A possible cause of this condition is that a
user application or process is using the card you are trying to remove. Determine whether the card is in
use by checking the operating system logs.
4. Slot does not power off
If the slot does not power off during a hot-plug removal operation, do not open the MRL on the OLX
divider. This action causes system failure or operating system crashes.
Converting SCSI From Simplex to Duplex
This section explains how to convert the HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server from simplex to duplex operation.
The process involves removing a jumper, installing a duplex PCA card, and plugging in the stowed channel B
cable to the appropriate sockets.
A SCSI jumper cable bridges the two SCSI connectors on the SCSI backplane when the server is configured
for simplex operation. This jumper must be removed in order to install the duplex board and to connect the
SCSI B cable.
Safety Information
To ensure safe handling of components and to prevent harm to both you and the server, follow these steps:
•
•
•
Use an antistatic wrist strap and a grounding mat, such as those included in the Electrically Conductive
Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-1155).
Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or
any electrical components on accessory boards.
Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build-up, such as wool or synthetic materials.
109
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been
disconnected from the server before attempting this procedure.
NOTE
Some restrictions apply to the mass storage devices that can be connected to the core I/O SCSI
HBA. If you convert the server to duplex configuration, you cannot install external SCSI
devices to the SCSI HBA core I/O controller.
Accessing the SCSI Backplane
Before adding the accessories required to convert the server from simplex to duplex, you must remove outer
components to access the SCSI backplane. To gain access to the SCSI backplane, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. See “Extend the Server from the
NOTE
If the server is pedestal-mounted, you need not remove the pedestal to perform the
simplex to duplex conversion. Proceed directly to the next step.
Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. (See “Removing the Processor Extender Board” on page 88.)
Convert to Duplex
To convert to duplex, follow these steps:
Step 1. Remove the SCSI jumper cable.
110
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-36 Removing the SCSI Jumper Cable
Step 2. Install the duplex board in the SCSI connector located nearest the disk drive cage.
a. Align the bracket tabs with the slots on the side of the disk drive cage.
b. Press the bracket against the disk drive cage until the bracket locks into place.
c. Align the connector of the duplex board with the connector on the SCSI backplane.
d. Press the board connector into the backplane connector.
NOTE
In simplex mode, both hard disk drives in slot 0 and slot 1 are driven by SCSI
channel A. When the duplex board is installed, the slot 1 hard disk drive is now
driven by SCSI channel B. If HP-UX was previously installed and whole disk vxfs
was not used, the system no longer boots.
111
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-37 Installing the Duplex Board
Step 3. Secure the duplex board to the disk drive cage by the bracket and to the SCSI backplane by the
a. Release the SCSI Cable B from its stowed position within the chassis.
b. Plug the SCSI Cable B connector into the SCSI connector located on the backplane next to the
duplex board installed in the previous step.
112
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-38 Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Backplane
Step 5. Connect the other end of the SCSI Cable B to the SCSI B channel connector on the SCSI adapter
board. (Figure 3-39)
a. Release the SCSI Cable B from its stowed position within the chassis.
b. Plug the SCSI Cable B connector into the SCSI B channel connector located at the rear of the
board.
113
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing Additional Components
Figure 3-39 Installing SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Adapter Board
Replacing the Removed Modules
To return the server to operational configuration, follow these steps:
Step 1. Replace the processor extender board. (See “Replacing the Processor Extender Board” on page 94.)
Step 6. If rack-mounted, slide the server back into the rack until it stops. (See “Installing the Server Into a
114
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Installing the Server Into a Rack, Non-HP rack, or Pedestal
Installing the Server Into a Rack, Non-HP rack, or Pedestal
The following information describes how to install the server into an HP rack. Information is also provided on
approved non-HP rack and pedestal mount alternatives.
HP Rack
HP 9000 entry class servers that are installed into racks are shipped with equipment mounting slides. The
Mid-Weight Slide Kit, (HP part number 5065-7291) is provided with each set of slides. Follow the steps in the
kit installation guide to determine where and how to place the server into the rack.
The following are additional instructions for installing the server into the rack:
Step 1. The cable management arm (CMA) is factory-configured to mount on the left side of the server (as
viewed from the rear of the chassis). You must switch the CMA from a left- to a right-mount
configuration. Mount the CMA on the right side of the server to ensure easy removal of the power
supplies.
Step 2. You must remove two T120 screws from the server bezel; one screw from the same location on each
side of the server. The screws are located behind the pull handles.
Non-HP Rack
Use the Mounting in non-HP racks guide for evaluating the installation of HP equipment in non-HP racks.
The guide provides information to help you determine if you need to qualify whether you can install,
maintain, and service any HP equipment in a non-HP rack. The guide is located on the web at:
http://www.hp.com/racksolutions
Once there, select Mounting information from the menu and select the guide titled Mounting in non-HP
racks.
Pedestal Mount
If you ordered the server as rackless, it has a pedestal pre-installed at the factory.
If the server is a rack mount and you want to change it to a pedestal mount (rackless), you need an HP 9000
rp4440 Server Rackless Mount Kit. This kit comes with an installation guide titled Converting Your Rack
Server to a Rackless Mount (HP part number A6979-96001).
To convert a rack-mount server to a pedestal-mount server, see Converting Your Rack Server to a Pedestal
Server on the web at:
http://www.hp.com/
Follow the instructions in the kit installation guide to attach the pedestal to the server.
115
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Connecting the Cables
Connecting the Cables
This section describes the cables to connect to power the server and to provide LAN connectivity for the
server.
AC Input Power
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers come with one or two power supplies installed. A power supply
includes an ac input connector which is rated for 200 to 240 VAC at 13 amps. If two power supplies are
installed, both power supplies must be connected separately to an ac power source.
Core I/O Connections
Each HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 server core I/O includes:
•
•
Two USB ports
One iLO MP
— One 10/100 LAN-RJ45.
— Three serial ports.
•
SCSI Host Bus Adapter (HBA)
— The SCSI HBA board is used to attach SCSI external mass storage to the system.
— Connections to the SCSI board include the external SCSI channels for external mass storage devices.
CAUTION
Some restrictions apply to the mass storage devices that can be connected to the core I/O
SCSI HBA. External connections to the SCSI HBA core I/O controller are only supported
when the internal cable between the SCSI backplane and the SCSI HBA core I/O card is
disconnected. The server is shipped in simplex configuration which supports external
devices. If you convert the server to duplex configuration, you cannot install external SCSI
devices.
•
LAN Connection
— The LAN board provides the basic external I/O connectivity for the system.
— Connections to the LAN card include one 10/100/1000 Base-T LAN RJ45 connector.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before attempting the following procedures.
Voltage is present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
116
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Connecting the Cables
Applying Standby Power to the Server
To apply standby power to the server, follow these steps:
Step 1. If the server has one power supply installed in slot P1, plug the power cord into that receptacle.
Plug the other end of the power cord into an appropriate outlet.
NOTE
The LED on the power supply does not illuminate in the standby power state. The
LED illuminates when the server is powered on to full power. If the power restore
feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PRcommand, the server
automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged into
the server.
Step 2. If the server has two power supplies, plug the second power cord into the power supply in slot P2.
Plug the other end of the power cord into an appropriate outlet.
Connecting to the LAN
The server has the following ports that provide network connectivity:
•
•
iLO MP LAN port. Use this port to access the Integrity iLO MP through the LAN.
Console/Remote/UPS port (RS-232). Use this port to access the iLO MP through the console.
Figure 3-40 Ports on Server Rear
HBA, Ultra 3 SCSI, 68 Pin Gigabit Ethernet LAN Port
Local Aux Remote
Console/Remote/UPS Port (RS-232)
(M Cable & RS-232 DB-9F to DB-9F)
iLO MP LAN Port (10/100 LAN Cable)
USB Ports
VGA Port
The VGA port is disabled on the rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
117
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Console Setup
To enable general network connectivity for the server, follow these steps:
Step 1. Obtain a valid IP address for each LAN port you plan to activate.
Step 2. Connect the LAN cable from an available LAN port into a live connection on the network.
Console Setup
This section describes how to set up and start a console session on the server.
Setting Up the Console
Setting up the console includes the following steps:
•
Determine the physical access method to connect cables. There are two physical connections to the
Integrity iLO MP:
— LAN
— Local RS-232 serial port
•
Configure the Integrity iLO MP and assign an IP address if necessary. Though there are several methods
to configuring the LAN; DHCP with DNS is the preferred method. DHCP with DNS comes preconfigured
with default factory settings, including a default user account and password. Other options include:
— ARP Ping
— Local RS-232 serial port
— Remote/modem port
118
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Console Setup
Setup Checklist
Table 3-13
Setup Checklist
Step
Action
X
Standard Setup
1
Preparation
1. Determine a LAN configuration method and assign an
IP address if necessary.
2. Determine an access method to select and connect the
cables.
2
Configure the iLO MP LAN
Choose one of the three methods to configure the LAN for
iLO MP access:
•
•
•
DHCP with DNS
ARP Ping
RS-232 serial port
3
4
5
6
Log on to the iLO MP
Log in to the iLO MP from a supported web browser or
command line using the default user name and password.
Change default user name and
password
Change the default user name and password on the
administrator account to your predefined selections.
Set up user accounts
Set up the user accounts if you are using the local accounts
feature.
Set up security access
Set up the security access settings.
Advanced Setup
1
Activate Advanced Pack Features
Activate advanced features by entering a license key.
119
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Console Setup
Preparation
You must perform the following tasks before you can configure the iLO MP LAN.
•
•
Determine the physical access method to select and connect cables.
Determine the iLO MP LAN configuration method and assign an IP address if necessary.
Determining the Physical iLO MP Access Method
Before you can access the iLO MP, you must first determine the correct physical connection method. The iLO
MP has a separate LAN port from the system LAN port. It requires a separate LAN drop, IP address, and
networking information from that of the port used by the operating system.
Table 3-14 lists the appropriate connection method, required connection components, and connectors to the
Table 3-14
Console Connection Matrix
Operating
System
Console Connection
Method
Required Connection Components
HP-UX
LAN port
10/100 LAN cable
Local RS-232 serial port
Remote/modem port
1. RS-232 DB-9F to DB-9F straight cable
2. Console device (for example, a laptop or ASCII terminal)
Determining the iLO MP LAN Configuration Method
To access the iLO MP through the iLO MP LAN, the iLO MP must acquire an IP address. The way the iLO
MP acquires an IP address depends on whether DHCP is enabled or disabled on the server, and if DHCP and
Once you have determined the iLO MP access, you must determine how you will configure the iLO MP LAN
to acquire an IP address using the following methods:
•
•
•
•
•
DHCP/DNS through the management LAN: use the DNS name on the toe-tag on the server
Setting up a static IP number using a laptop with DHCP services and the management LAN
ARP Ping to set a static IP using a laptop and the management LAN
Local RS-232 serial port and a serial console
Remote/modem port
Table 3-15 provides all the possible scenarios. Use this table to help you select the appropriate LAN
configuration method to obtain an IP address.
Table 3-15
LAN Configuration Methods
RS-232 Serial Port
(iLO MP LCcommand)
DHCP
DNS
LAN Configuration Method
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
DHCP
DHCP, RS-232 serial port, or remote/modem port
ARP Ping
121
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Console Setup
Table 3-15
LAN Configuration Methods (Continued)
RS-232 Serial Port
DHCP
DNS
LAN Configuration Method
(iLO MP LCcommand)
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
ARP Ping
ARP Ping, RS-232 serial port, or remote/modem port
RS-232 serial port, or remote/modem port
RS-232 serial port, remote/modem port, or ARP Ping
Cannot set up the LAN. Reconsider your criteria.
Yes
No
Yes
Once you have determined how you will configure the iLO MP LAN in order to acquire an IP address, you
must configure the iLO MP LAN using the selected method.
Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS
DHCP automatically configures all DHCP-enabled servers with IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. All HP 9000 entry class servers with iLO MP are shipped from the factory with DHCP enabled.
TIP
HP recommends using the DHCP and DNS method to simplify access to the iLO MP.
When you use DHCP and DNS, you can connect to the iLO MP by typing the DNS name in the browser rather
than an IP address only if the following conditions apply:
•
•
•
•
DHCP must be enabled (DHCP is enabled by default).
You are using a DHCP server that provides the domain name and the primary DNS server IP address.
The primary DNS server accepts dynamic DNS (DDNS) updates.
The primary DNS server IP address has been configured through the DHCP server.
To configure the iLO MP using DHCP and DNS, follow these steps:
Step 1. Obtain the factory-set DNS name from the toe-tag on the server. The DNS name is 14 characters
long, consisting of the letters mp followed by the 12 characters of the MAC address, for example:
mp0014c29c064f. This address is assigned to the iLO MP hardware. The iLO MP has a unique
MAC address that identifies the hardware on the network.
Step 2. Connect the LAN cable from the server to an active network port.
Step 3. Apply ac power to the server (if not already done).
Step 4. Open a browser, telnet, or SSH client and enter the DNS name. The Integrity iLO MP Log In window
opens.
Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using ARP Ping
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and Packet Internet Grouper (Ping) utility uses ARP packets to ping,
or discover, a device on the local network segment. The IP address you assign to the server must use the same
network segment, or subnet, as the computer assigning the address. ARP does not work across routed or
switched networks.
122
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Console Setup
ARP Ping operational issues include the following:
•
You can use ARP Ping regardless of the status of DHCP, unless an IP address has ever been acquired
using DHCP.
•
•
When ARP Ping is successful, DHCP status is disabled.
Some DHCP server options can cause the apparent issuance of ARP Ping to the iLO MP which will negate
the DHCP/DDNS method.
•
•
The PC and the server must be on the same physical subnet.
When a new server is first booted, DHCP is automatically available (factory-set default); but ARP Ping
does not start until three minutes after the iLO MP is booted. This applies to every subsequent boot of the
iLO MP until an IP address is obtained by DHCP or has been assigned using the LCcommand, or ARP
Ping succeeds.
There are two ways to use the ARP Ping utility:
•
Connect a PC to the network that is on the same physical subnet as the server and run the ARP Ping
commands from the PC.
•
Locate an existing server on the network, log into it, and run the ARP Ping commands from the server.
Table 3-16 lists the ARP Ping commands.
Table 3-16 ARP Ping Commands
Command
Description
arp -s
ping
This command assigns an IP address to the iLO MP MAC address. This ARP table
entry maps the MAC address of the iLO MP LAN interface to the static IP address
designated for that interface.
This command tests network connections. It verifies that the iLO MP LAN port is
configured with the appropriate IP address.
The following procedure explains how to use the ARP Ping utility using a PC that is connected to the network
that is on the same physical subnet as the server.
To configure a static IP address using the ARP Ping utility, follow these steps:
Step 1. Obtain the iLO MP MAC address. To set the IP address using ARP, you must know the MAC
address of the iLO MP LAN. You can find the MAC address of the iLO MP LAN on a label on the
server.
IMPORTANT Make sure you obtain the MAC address to the iLO MP LAN and not the MAC
address to the server core LAN.
Step 2. Verify that an active LAN cable on the local subnet is connected to the iLO MP LAN port on the
server.
Step 3. Access a PC on the same physical subnet as the server.
Step 4. Open a DOS window on the PC.
Step 5. At the DOS prompt, enter arp -s to assign the IP address to the DNS name.
arp -s <IP address you assign to the iLO MAC address> <iLO MAC address>
123
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Console Setup
For example:
arp -s 192.0.2.1 00-00-0c-07-ac-00
Step 6. At the DOS prompt, enter ping followed by the IP address to verify that the iLO MP LAN port is
configured with the appropriate IP address. The destination address is the IP address that is
mapped to the iLO MAC address. Perform this task from the PC that has the ARP table entry.
ping<IP address you assigned to the iLO MAC address>
For example:
ping 192.0.2.1
Step 7. Connect to the iLO MP LAN using this IP address.
Step 8. Use web or telnet access to connect to the iLO MP from a host on the local subnet and finish setting
up the LAN parameters (gateway and subnet).
Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using the RS-232 Serial Port
The following procedure shows how to configure the iLO MP LAN using the RS-232 serial port.
IMPORTANT Do not configure duplicate IP addresses on different servers within the same network.
Duplicate server IP addresses conflict and the servers cannot connect to the network.
The LC command enables you to configure an IP address, DNS name, subnet mask, and gateway address.
IMPORTANT Ensure you have a console connection through the RS-232 serial port or a network connection
through the LAN to access the iLO MP and use the LCcommand.
To assign a static IP address using the LCcommand, follow these steps:
Step 1. Ensure the emulation software device is properly configured. The terminal emulation device runs
software that interfaces with the server. The software emulates console output as it would appear
on an ASCII terminal screen and displays it on a console device screen.
Step 2. To ensure the emulation software is correctly configured, verify the following:
a. Verify that the communication settings are configured as follows:
•
•
•
•
8/none (parity)
9600 baud
None (receive)
None (transmit)
b. Verify that the terminal type is configured appropriately. Supported terminal types are as
follows:
•
•
•
•
hpterm
vt100
vt100+
vt-utf8
124
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Console Setup
IMPORTANT Do not use hpterm and vt100 terminal types at the same time.
There are many different emulation software applications. Consult the help section of your
emulation software application for instructions on how to configure the software options.
Step 3. Use Table 3-14 to determine the required connection components and the ports used to connect the
server to the console device.
Step 4. Connect the cables.
a. Connect the DB-9 end of the RS-232 serial port female-to-female cable to the console RS-232
serial port.
b. Connect the other end of the DB-9 female-to-female cable to the console device.
Step 5. Start the emulation software on the console device.
Step 7. At the MP Main Menu, enter CM and press Enter to select command mode.
Step 8. At the command mode prompt, enter LS and press Enter. The screen displays the default LAN
configuration values. Write down the default values or log the information to a file for future
troubleshooting.
Step 9. Use the LCcommand to disable DHCP.
a. From the LCcommand menu, type D and press Enter.
b. Follow the instructions on the screen to change the DHCP status from Enabled to Disabled.
c. Enter XD -R to reset the iLO MP.
Step 10. Use the LCcommand to enter information for the IP address, host, subnet mask, gateway
parameters, and so on.
Step 11. Enter XD -R to reset the iLO MP.
Step 12. After the iLO MP resets, log in to the iLO MP again and enter CM at the MP> prompt.
Step 13. Enter LS to confirm that DHCP is disabled and display a list of updated LAN configuration
settings.
Logging In to the iLO MP
To log in to the iLO MP, follow these steps:
Step 1. Access the iLO MP using the LAN, RS-232 serial port, telnet, SSH, or web method. The iLO MP
login prompt displays.
Step 2. Log in using the default the iLO MP user name and password (Admin/Admin). The MP Main Menu
screen displays.
For security reasons, HP strongly recommends that you modify the default settings during the
Following is the MP Main Menu screen:
125
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Console Setup
MP MAIN MENU:
CO: Console
VFP: Virtual Front Panel
CM: Command Menu
CL: Console Logs
SL: Show Event Logs
HE: Main Menu Help
X: Exit Connection
This example shows the MP Main Menu accessed through the local serial port. The list of commands displayed
on the screen can be different depending on the method of access to the iLO MP.
When logging in using the local or remote RS-232 serial ports, the login prompt may not display if another
user is logged in through these ports. Use Ctrl-B to access the MP Main Menu and the iLO MP prompt (MP>).
Additional Setup
This section provides additional information to help you set up the iLO MP.
Modifying User Accounts and Default Password
The iLO MP comes preconfigured with default factory settings, including a default user account and
password. The two default user accounts at initial login are:
•
All Rights (Administrator) level user:
login = Admin
password = Admin
•
Console Rights (Operator) level user:
login = Oper
password = Oper
NOTE
User account and password are case sensitive.
IMPORTANT For security reasons, HP strongly recommends that you modify the default settings during the
initial login session.
Make the following changes using any of the iLO MP user interfaces.
To modify default account configuration settings, follow these steps:
Step 1. Log in as the administrator. You must log in as the administrator in order to modify default user
configuration settings.
Step 2. To modify default passwords, follow these steps:
a. Access the MP Main Menu.
b. Enter CM at the MP>prompt.
c. Enter UC at the MP:CM>prompt and follow the prompts to modify default passwords.
Step 3. To set up user accounts, follow these steps:
a. Access the MP Main Menu.
b. Enter CM at the MP>prompt.
126
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Accessing the Host Console
c. Enter UC at the MP:CM>prompt and follow the prompts to modify user accounts.
Setting Up Security
For greater security and reliability, HP recommends that iLO MP management traffic be on a separate
dedicated management network and that only administrators be granted access to that network. This not
only improves performance by reducing traffic load across the main network, it also acts as the first line of
defense against security attacks. A separate network enables administrators to physically control which
workstations are connected to the network.
HP strongly recommends that you modify the default settings during the initial login session and determine
the security access required and what user accounts and privileges are needed. Create local accounts or use
directory services to control user access. See “Modifying User Accounts and Default Password” on page 126.
Security Access Settings
CAUTION
When DHCP is enabled, the system is vulnerable to security risks because anyone can access
the iLO MP until you change the default user name and password.
HP strongly recommends you assign user groups and rights before proceeding.
Determine the security access required and user accounts and privileges needed. The iLO MP provides
options to control user access. Select one of the following options to prevent unauthorized access to the iLO
MP:
•
•
•
Change the default user name and password. See “Modifying User Accounts and Default Password” on
Create local accounts. You can store up to 19 user names and passwords to manage iLO MP access. This is
ideal for small environments such as labs and small-to-medium sized businesses.
Use directory services. Use the corporate directory to manage iLO MP user access. This is ideal for
environments with a large number of frequently changing users. If you plan to use directory services, HP
recommends leaving at least one local account enabled as an alternate method of access.
Accessing the Host Console
This section describes the different ways to access the host console of the server.
Accessing the Host Console With the TUI - CO Command
This section describes the steps to access the host console using the text user interface (TUI).
To access the host console through the iLO MP, follow these steps:
Step 1. Log in using your user account name and password at the login page.
Step 2. At the iLO MP login prompt (MP>), enter the COcommand to switch the console terminal from the
MP Main Menu to mirrored/redirected console mode. All mirrored data is displayed.
Step 3. To return to the iLO MP command interface, type Ctrl-B or Esc and + and press Enter.
Interacting with the iLO MP Using the Web GUI
Web browser access is an embedded feature of the iLO MP.
127
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Accessing the Host Console
The iLO MP has a separate LAN port from the system LAN port. It requires a separate LAN drop, IP address,
and networking information from that of the port used by the operating system.
Before starting this procedure, you must have the following information:
•
•
DNS name for the iLO MP LAN. This is found on the toe-tag on the server.
Host name (used when messages are logged or printed).
To interact with the iLO MP through the web GUI, follow these steps:
Step 1. Open a web browser and enter the DNS name for the iLO MP. The iLO MP login page opens.
Figure 3-42 Web Login Page
Step 2. Log in using your user account name and password at the login page.
Step 3. Click Sign In. The Status Summary page displays after login.
128
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Accessing the Host Console
Figure 3-43 Status Summary Page
Function Tabs
Navigation Bar
Display Screen
Step 4. Select the web interface functions by clicking the Function tabs at the top of the page. Each function
lists options in the Navigation Bar on the left side of the page.
Step 5. Click an option link to display data in the Display screen.
Step 6. Click Refresh to update the display.
The iLO MP web interface has a robust help system. To launch iLO MP help, click the Help tab in the Display
screen or click the question mark key (?) at the top right corner of each page to display help about that page.
Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA
IMPORTANT Onboard VGA graphics capability is not supported. You must install the A6150 graphics card
to enable VGA grpahics support. See “Enabling VGA Graphics Capability” on page 130.
The graphics capability of your HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server is not supported. The 15 pin VGA port on
the back of your HP server is covered and does not function. DO NOT attempt to attach a monitor to this port.
Because the graphics chip associated with this port is onboard the management processor card and cannot be
turned off, you get an UNCLAIMED UNKNOWNmessage if you run the ioscancommand. This is normal and can
be ignored.
Following is a screen shot of the ioscanscreen:
129
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Accessing the Host Console
root@myhost> ioscan -fH 0/7/2/0
Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description
=================================================================
unknown -1 0/7/2/0 UNCLAIMED UNKNOWN PCI Display (10025159)
root@myhost>
To enable the VGA graphics capability, continue with the next section.
Enabling VGA Graphics Capability
To enable graphics capability on your HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server you must install the supported
A6150B graphics PCI card kit in one of the open PCI slots.
Installing Your A6150B Graphics Card
If you ordered the A6150B graphics card kit for installation into a HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server, install
the graphics card to activate graphics capability. Do not install the USB card; it is not supported. USB
capability is already incorporated into your rp4410 or rp4440 server, and the USB ports are located on the
rear panel.
To install the A6150 graphics card, see “Installing a PCI Card Offline” on page 227.
Connecting a Monitor Using the VGA Port
Use these procedures to connect a monitor to the VGA port on the rear of the server.
NOTE
You cannot access the iLO MP using VGA.
This method requires three elements:
•
•
•
Monitor (with a VGA connector)
Keyboard (with a USB connector)
Mouse (with a USB connector)
IMPORTANT The server console output does not display on the console device screen until the server boots to
the BCH Main Menu. Start a console session using the RS-232 serial port method to view console
output before booting to the BCH Main Menu or to access the iLO MP.
To access the graphic console with VGA, follow these steps:
Step 1. Remove the VGA port cover on the rear of the server.
Step 2. Connect the monitor, keyboard, and mouse cables.
a. Connect the monitor VGA cable to the appropriate VGA port on the server.
b. Connect the keyboard USB cable to the appropriate USB port on the server.
c. Connect the mouse USB cable to the appropriate USB port on the server.
Step 3. Power on the server. The BCH Main Menu prompt displays.
The graphic console output displays on the monitor screen.
130
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Powering the Server ON and Off
Powering the Server ON and Off
This section provides information and procedures for powering on and powering off the server.
Power States
The server has three power states:
•
•
•
Standby power
Full power
Off
Table 3-17 lists the server power states.
Table 3-17
Power States
Power Activated through the
iLO MP PCCommand; or
Front Panel Power Button
Activated?
Power Cable
PluggedInto
Receptacle?
Standby dc
Voltage
Applied?
dc Voltage
Applied?
Power States
Standby power
Full power
Off
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
NOTE
If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PRcommand, the server
automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server.
Powering On the Server
Power on the server to full power using the following methods if the server is in the standby power state:
•
•
iLO MP PCcommand
Power button
Powering On the Server Using the iLO MP PC Command
NOTE
If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PRcommand, the server
automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server.
To power on the server using the iLO MP PCcommand, follow these steps:
Step 1. Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.
Step 2. Initiate a console session, and access the MP Main Menu.
Step 3. Enter CM to enable command mode.
131
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Powering the Server ON and Off
Step 4. Enter PC to use the remote power control command.
Step 5. Enter ON to power on the server, and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action.
Step 6. Start the operating system.
Powering On the Server Manually
NOTE
If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PRcommand, the server
automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server.
To manually power on the server, follow these steps:
Step 1. Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.
Step 2. Press the power button to start the server.
Step 3. Start the operating system.
Powering Off the Server
Power off the server using the following methods if the server is in the standby or full power state:
•
•
iLO MP PCcommand
Power button
Powering Off the Server Using the iLO MP PC Command
To power off the server using the iLO MP PCcommand, follow these steps:
Step 1. Gracefully shut down the operating system.
Step 2. Initiate a console session, and access the MP Main Menu.
Step 3. Enter CM to enable command mode.
Step 4. Enter PC to use the remote power control command.
Step 5. Enter OFF to power off the server, and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action.
CAUTION
The main dc voltage is now removed from the system; however, ac voltage for
standby power is still present in the server.
Step 6. Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.
Powering Off the Server Manually
To manually power off the server, follow these steps:
Step 1. Gracefully shut down the operating system.
Step 2. Press the power button to power off the server.
132
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Powering the Server ON and Off
CAUTION
The main dc voltage is now removed from the system; however, ac voltage for
standby power is still present in the server.
Step 3. Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.
133
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Booting the Operating System
Booting the Operating System
This section covers procedures for booting and shutting down an operating system on the server.
Supported Operating System
The only supported operating system on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers is HP-UX 11i Version 1 (and
higher HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems.)
Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX
This section describes booting and shutting down HP-UX on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
•
To boot HP-UX, follow these steps:
boot HP-UX. Typically this results in booting HP-UX in multi-user mode.
Volume Management (LVM) maintenance mode.
•
Standard HP-UX Booting Using Boot Console Handler
To the autoboot function is enabled, the server boots to the installed operating system. If autoboot is not
enabled, the server enters the boot console handler (BCH). The BCH enables you to control the server’s
booting environment.
To set the boot path if HP-UX is at a path other than the primary path, follow these steps:
To boot HP-UX, follow these steps:
Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter Menu> co.
Step 2. From the COnfiguration Menu > prompt, enter pa pri xx/xx/xx.
Step 3. From the COnfiguration Menu> prompt, enter ma.
To boot HP-UX once you have set the primary path, follow these steps:
Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter Menu> bo pri. The following prompt displays:
Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting (y/n)?
Step 2. Enter n.
NOTE
If the server fails to boot, you may be required to boot from a DVD that contains the operating
system and other necessary software.
Booting HP-UX in Single-User Mode
To boot to HP-UX in single-user mode, follow these steps:
134
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Booting the Operating System
Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter command or menu> bo pri. The following message displays:
Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?>
Step 2. To interact with IPL, answer y.
Step 3. At the ISL> prompt, type hpux-is.
Booting HP-UX in LVM Maintenance Mode
To boot to HP-UX in LVM maintenance mode, follow these steps:
Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter command or menu> bo pri. The following message displays:
Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?>
Step 2. To interact with IPL, answer y.
Step 3. At the ISL> prompt, type hpux-lm.
Shutting Down HP-UX
To shut down HP-UX running on a server, use the shutdowncommand. You have the following options when
shutting down HP-UX:
•
•
To shut down and reboot an HP-UX system, use the shutdown -r command.
To shut down and halt (power off) an HP-UX system, use the shutdown -h command.
For details, see the shutdown (1M) manpage and follow these steps:
Step 1. From the HP-UX command line, issue the shutdown command to shut down the HP-UX operating
system.
Step 2. Log in to HP-UX running on the server that you want to shut down.
You should log in to the iLO MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the server
console. Accessing the console through the iLO MP enables you to maintain console access to the
server after HP-UX has shut down.
Step 3. Issue the shutdown command with the appropriate command-line options.
The command-line options you specify dictate the way in which HP-UX shuts down, and whether
the server is rebooted.
Use the following list to choose an HP-UX shutdown option for the server:
•
To shut down HP-UX and halt (power off) the server, issue the shutdown -h command.
To reboot a halted server you must power on the server using the PCcommand at the iLO MP
Command menu.
•
To shut down HP-UX and reboot the server, issue the shutdown -r command.
Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler
From the BCH Main Menu, enter into go the INformation Menu. Use the corresponding command from the
menu to verify the type and quantity of processors, memory, and I/O cards:
Step 1. To enter the POSSE shell, type COfrom the iLO MP Main Menu. To list all the categories available in
the shell, type help.
•
pr (Processors)
135
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
•
•
me (Memory)
io (Check the PCI device information to determine if the values match the devices installed in
the server)
Step 2. Verify the parameters.
Step 3. To return to the BCH Main Menu, use the macommand .
Troubleshooting
This section provides basic server troubleshooting information. It is designed to help you diagnose common
issues that can occur during server installation.
Troubleshooting Methodology
The server was tested prior to shipping. Failures encountered during installation can be due to damage that
occurred in transit. Reseating connectors can clear problems that result from rough handling. If you are
installing components or assemblies, compatibility problems or incorrect installations can be the cause of the
problems. If you are installing components or assemblies, check that items are correctly installed and that all
connectors are fully engaged. If the unit does not power on, check the power source before proceeding.
If a problem is encountered during initial operation, remove any add-in or optional components and retest the
server before continuing. Verify basic server operation before installing additional cards and configuring
software and hardware for the server requirements.
Troubleshooting is based on observation of server status indications and error messages, and by checking
system event logs. You can observe the LED indicators on the front and rear of the server. Error messages are
displayed on local and remote consoles. System history (console, event, and history logs) is available through
the iLO MP, and is accessed through the console.
Offline troubleshooting programs are available on the resource CD that is shipped with the server. To
troubleshoot the server, you must be familiar with the Offline Diagnostics Environment (ODE) which runs in
the Boot Console Handler (BCH). Descriptions and user information about offline troubleshooting tools are
available on the web at:
http://www.docs.hp.com.
The offline tools are available for downloading at:
http://www.software.hp.com.
Troubleshooting Using the Server Power Button
The server power button on the front panel operates differently depending on how long the button is held in,
and on what the system is doing when the button is pressed. You must be aware of its uses to properly
troubleshoot the system.
136
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
Table 3-18 describes what happens when the server is at BCH, and you press the power button.
Table 3-18 Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and at BCH
Action
Reaction
One to three seconds
Five seconds or longer
System power turns off immediately (hard power off)
System power turns off immediately (hard power off)
Table 3-19 describes what happens when the server is on with the operating system running, and you press
the power button.
Table 3-19
Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and OS is Running
Action
Reaction
One to three seconds
Five seconds or longer
System power turns off (software controlled power off)
System power turns off immediately (hard power off)
If the server is off, and power is not connected to server power supplies, pressing the power button has no
effect.
If the server is off, and power is connected to server power supplies, the front panel power LED blinks at a
1 Hz rate. In this state, standby power is available to server circuits, but main power is off.
Table 3-20 describes what happens when the server is off, and you press the power button.
Table 3-20
Server Power Button Functions When Server is Off
Action
One to three seconds
Reaction
System power turns on
Server Does Not Power On
The server power button on the front panel operates differently depending on how long the button is held, and
on what the system is doing when the button is pressed. You must be aware of its uses to properly
troubleshoot the system.
NOTE
If the server is off, and power is not connected to server power supplies, pressing the power
button has no effect.
Power problems during installation are usually related to the installation process. If the server does not
power on, check the LED indicators on the power supply rear panels and follow these steps.
•
If the ac power LED on the power supply on the rear panel of the server is lit, power is available to the
server.
•
If the ac power LED is not lit, the server is either in standby power mode, or there is a problem. Reseat
the power supply. If the problem persists, remove and reseat the board within the server. If the problem
persists, replace the power supply or the power supply interface board.
137
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
•
If the console shows that the server is powered on, but server LEDs indicate that power is off, remove and
reseat connectors on the LED status board. If the problem persists, replace the LED status board.
If the console shows that the server is not powered on (server is off), remove and reseat connectors on the
system board. If the problem persists, replace the power supply interface board, or the system board.
BCH Menu is Not Available
If you cannot access the BCH from either the main disk partition or the CD, use the following tools to help
solve the problem:
•
•
Front panel LEDs
iLO MP
— Console messages
— System event logs (SEL)
Operating System Does Not Boot
If the operating system does not boot, but you are able to reach the BCH from either the main disk partition
or the CD, use the following tools to help solve the problem:
•
•
Using the BCH menu prompt, check the system logs and analyze any error messages.
Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE)
Operating System Boots with Problems
If the operating system is running and you are experiencing problems, use the following tools to help solve the
problem:
•
•
LEDs
Error Messages and event logs
Intermittent Server Problems
You can usually trace intermittent problems that occur during installation to power source problems, a loose
connector, or some other hardware problem. If you are experiencing intermittent problems, follow these steps:
1. Check iLO MP logs and analyze the problem. Determine if there is more than one symptom and if the
problem is random.
2. Verify that the ac power source is stable.
3. Reseat all rear panel connectors.
4. Reseat all hot-swappable fans and power supplies.
5. Reseat all main memory DIMMs.
6. Reseat all cable harnesses and board connectors.
138
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
DVD Problems
DVD problems that occur during installation are usually related to faulty connections. If you are experiencing
DVD problems, follow these steps:
1. Remove and reinsert the disk.
2. Replace the disk.
3. Remove and reinstall the DVD drive. Check that connectors are fully engaged.
4. Replace the DVD drive.
Hard Drive Problems
Hard drive problems that occur during installation are usually due to rough handling. The drive may not be
correctly seated or may have been damaged in transit. If you are experiencing hard drive problems, follow
these steps:
1. Remove and reinsert the faulty hard drive.
2. Swap the hard drive with one from another slot or with a known good spare.
3. Remove and reinstall the hard drive backplane. Check that connectors are fully engaged.
4. Replace the hard drive backplane.
Console Problems
Console problems during installations can be caused by faulty interconnections. If you are experiencing
monitor, keyboard, or mouse problems, follow these steps:
1. Check the monitor controls. Adjust contrast and brightness as required.
2. Inspect all power and interconnecting cables. Check that all console connectors are fully engaged.
3. Check that all iLO MP board connectors are fully engaged.
4. Exercise the appropriate self-test features of the console software.
Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware
HP makes every effort to provide you with the most current version of firmware. However, there can be
instances when this is not the case.
To ensure you have the latest version of the firmware running on the server, download the latest version of
the firmware from the web, and create a CD to install the firmware on the server.
Downloading the Latest Version of the Firmware
To download the latest version of the firmware from the web, follow these steps:
Step 1. Go to: http://www.hp.com/go/bizsupport
Step 2. Select download drivers and software.
Step 3. Select PA-RISC-based servers from the Servers category.
Step 4. Select your product from the servers listed.
Step 5. Select your operating system.
139
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
Step 6. Select the firmware package you want to download.
Step 7. Download the firmware package, and follow the instructions for updating the firmware included in
the release notes.
Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware on the Server
To install the latest version of the firmware on the server, follow these steps:
Step 1. Initiate a server console session.
Step 2. Insert the CD with the copy of the latest version of the firmware.
Step 3. Using the BCH menu prompt, boot to the drive that contains the CD with the updated firmware.
Step 4. Follow the instructions to update the firmware.
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
If you suspect a hardware failure during installation, the system LEDs help you identify the problem. Front
control panel LEDs and QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs provide system and subassembly status
information that assist in identifying failing items. The following sections describe these LEDs.
Front Control Panel LEDs
The front control panel LEDs show the system status at a glance. If warning or attention lights are flashing,
check the QuickFind diagnostic panel for further information.
Figure 3-44
Front Control Panel LEDs
System LED
Power LED
Power Button
Disk LED
TOC/NMI Button
Thermal LED
Locator
Button/LED
Table 3-21
Front Control Panel LED Definitions
LED/
Button
State
Flash Rate
Steady
Color
Description
System LED
System LED
Running
Booting
Green
Green
System normal—OS up and running.
OS booting or at BCH.
Flashing at 0.5
Hz
140
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
Table 3-21
Front Control Panel LED Definitions (Continued)
LED/
Button
State
Flash Rate
Color
Description
System LED
Attention
Flashing at 1 Hz Yellow
Warning—System needs attention.
Redundancy lost, component failure pending.
(Additional information can be found in the
System Log).
System LED
System LED
Power LED
Power LED
Power LED
Disk LED
Fault
Off
Flashing at 2 Hz Red
Hard fault, system halted.
System off.
Off
N/A
On
Steady
Green
Power normal.
On
Flashing at 1 Hz Yellow
Housekeeping voltage present.
Power off.
Off
Off
Off
Flashing at rate
of disk activity
Green
Disk activity.
Thermal LED OK
Steady
Green
Thermal OK.
Thermal LED Warning
Flashing at 1 Hz Yellow
Flashing at 1 Hz Blue
Thermal warning.
Locator
LED/button
System locator LED can be remotely or
locally activated/deactivated.
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs
The QuickFind diagnostic panel is located under the top cover and is attached to the top of the power supply
cage. This panel contains LEDs that illuminate to show the status of associated components and assemblies.
Table 3-22 lists the various LEDs and display combinations that you may encounter, and recommends the
appropriate maintenance action.
Table 3-22
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LED Definitions
Item
LED 0
LED1
LED2
LED3
Details
Processor
Socket 0
Socket 1
Socket 2
Socket 3
Check that recently installed items are
correctly installed.
Subsystem
CPU
board
Memory
board
I/O board n/a
Check that the indicated board is correctly
seated.
I/O VRM
n/a
n/a
0
n/a
n/a
1
n/a
n/a
2
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
CPU VRM
Fan module
Check for a fan that is not functioning. Look
for loose connections or missing items.
141
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
Table 3-22
Item
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LED Definitions (Continued)
LED 0 LED1 LED2 LED3 Details
Memory
bank X (0-7)
DIMM xA DIMM xB DIMM xC DIMM xD The specified DIMM has failed—reseat or
replace the memory board and DIMM.
If all the LEDs for a rank (0-7) are lit and the
memory config error LED is lit, then the
DIMMs in the specified rank are
mismatched—review the information on
installing memory.
Check power n/a
supply
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
The faulty power supply LED (located on
Power supply) is lit. Reseat the power supply.
Memory
n/a
The DIMMs in a rank are
mismatched—review the information on
installing memory.
config error
Processor
config error
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
The processors are mismatched—review the
information on installing processors.
Missing
component
A required component(s) is not detected.
Check that recently installed items are
correctly installed.
System temp n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Make sure nothing is blocking server airflow.
Check that recently installed items are
correctly installed.
Check event n/a
log
An event has occurred that requires
attention.
142
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
Figure 3-45
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel
Processor
Subsystem
I/O VRM
CPU VRM
Fan
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
Power Supply
Memory Config Error
Processor Config Error
Missing Component
System Temperature
Check Event Log
143
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the System
Troubleshooting
Information to Collect Before You Contact Support
Before you contact HP support, you should:
Step 1. Check information on troubleshooting and attempt to solve the problem.
•
Note failure symptoms and error indications (LEDs and messages) by checking the system
event log.
•
Try to determine precisely what did or did not happen.
Step 2. Collect the following information:
•
•
The model number of your server (for example, HP 9000 rp4440)
The product number of your server. This is found on the identification label, which is found at
the front of the unit (typically A9956A, A9951A, and so on).
•
The serial number of your server. This is found on the identification label.
Step 3. Become familiar with your system configuration:
•
•
•
•
Are you using the LAN, RS232, or web interface to monitor the server?
How many processors, DIMMs, and PCI cards have been installed?
What versions of processor, memory, and PCI cards are used and where are they installed?
What accessories are installed?
Step 4. Determine the following:
•
•
•
•
Which firmware versions are in use?
When did the problem start?
Have recent changes been made to the system?
Which operating system and version is in use?
144
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Booting the Operating System
This chapter describes procedures for booting and shutting down the HP-UX operating system on the HP
9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
This chapter addresses the following topics:
•
•
•
Supported Operating System
Booting the server loads the operating system, which is essential for running all other programs.
You can only run one operating system on the server at one time.
The HP-UX 11i version 1 (and higher HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems) is supported on the
server.
NOTE
HP-UX is the only supported operating system for single-core processors.
You can find information about the HP-UX operating system on the web at:
Server Hardware Information:
http://docs.hp.com/hpux/hw/
Diagnostics and Event Monitoring: Hardware Support Tools
Complete information about HP’s hardware support tools, including online and offline diagnostics and event
monitoring tools, is at the http://docs.hp.com/hpux/diag/website. This site has manuals, tutorials,
FAQs, and other reference material.
Books about HP-UX Published by Prentice Hall
The http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/website lists the HP books that Prentice Hall currently publishes, such
as HP-UX books including:
•
HP-UX 11i System Administration Handbook
http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/prentice/ptr_0130600814.html
•
HP-UX Virtual Partitions
http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/prentice/ptr_0130352128.html
HP Books are available worldwide through bookstores, online booksellers, and office and computer stores.
145
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Booting the Operating System
Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX
Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX
This section describes booting and shutting down HP-UX on the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
•
To boot HP-UX, follow one of these procedures:
boot HP-UX. Typically this results in booting HP-UX in multi-user mode.
Volume Management (LVM) maintenance mode.
•
Standard HP-UX Booting Using Boot Console Handler
To the autoboot function is enabled, the server boots to the installed operating system. If autoboot is not
enabled, the server enters the boot console handler (BCH). The BCH enables you to control the server’s
booting environment.
To set the boot path if HP-UX is at a path other than the primary path, follow these steps:
To boot HP-UX, follow these steps:
Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter Menu> co.
Step 2. From the COnfiguration Menu > prompt, enter pa pri xx/xx/xx.
Step 3. From the COnfiguration Menu> prompt, enter ma.
To boot HP-UX once you have set the primary path, follow these steps:
Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter Menu> bo pri. The following prompt displays:
Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting (y/n)?
Step 2. Enter n.
NOTE
If the server fails to boot, you may be required to boot from a DVD that contains the operating
system and other necessary software.
146
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Booting the Operating System
Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX
Booting HP-UX in Single-User Mode
To boot to HP-UX in single-user mode, follow these steps:
Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter command or menu> bo pri. The following message displays:
Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?>
Step 2. To interact with IPL, answer y.
Step 3. At the ISL> prompt, type hpux -is.
Booting HP-UX in LVM Maintenance Mode
To boot to HP-UX in LVM maintenance mode, follow these steps:
Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter command or menu> bo pri. The following message displays:
Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?>
Step 2. To interact with IPL, answer y.
Step 3. At the ISL> prompt, type hpux -lm.
Shutting Down HP-UX
To shut down HP-UX running on a system, use the shutdowncommand. You have the following options when
shutting down HP-UX:
•
•
To shut down and reboot an HP-UX system, use the shutdown -r command.
To shut down and halt (power off) an HP-UX system, use the shutdown -h command.
For details, see the shutdown (1M) manpage and follow these steps:
Step 1. From the HP-UX command line, issue the shutdown command to shut down the HP-UX operating
system.
Step 2. Log in to HP-UX running on the system that you want to shut down.
You should log in to the iLO MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system
console. Accessing the console through the iLO MP enables you to maintain console access to the
server after HP-UX has shut down.
Step 3. Issue the shutdown command with the appropriate command-line options.
The command-line options you specify dictate the way in which HP-UX shuts down, and whether
the server is rebooted.
Use the following list to choose an HP-UX shutdown option for the server:
•
To shut down HP-UX and halt (power off) the server, issue the shutdown -h command.
To reboot a halted server you must power on the server using the PCcommand at the iLO MP
Command menu.
•
To shut down HP-UX and reboot the server, issue the shutdown -r command.
147
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Booting the Operating System
Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler
Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler
From the BCH Main Menu, enter into go the INformation Menu. Use the corresponding command from the
menu to verify the type and quantity of processors, memory, and I/O cards:
Step 1. To enter the POSSE shell, type COfrom the iLO MP Main Menu. To list all the categories available in
the shell, type help.
•
•
•
pr (Processors)
me (Memory)
io (Check the PCI device information to determine if the values match the devices installed in
the server)
Step 2. Verify the parameters.
Step 3. To return to the BCH Main Menu, use the macommand .
148
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides a preferred methodology (strategies and procedures) and tools for troubleshooting
server error and fault conditions.
This chapter addresses the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Troubleshooting Methodology
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before working within the server.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Do not operate the server for more than 10 minutes with any cover (including power supplies
and disk drives) removed. If you are hot-swapping a fan, reinstall the cover within 10 minutes
to prevent overheating. Otherwise, damage to system components can result due to improper
airflow cooling.
To troubleshoot the server with online diagnostic tools, you must be familiar with the HP-UX operating
system. You should also be familiar with the Offline Diagnostics Environment (ODE). Install both online and
offline troubleshooting programs on your system before trouble is suspected. Descriptions and user
information about offline troubleshooting tools are available on the web at:
Use the online diagnostic tools if you can boot your system. Online troubleshooting programs area available
on the HP-UX operating system CD.
If you cannot boot your system, run the offline troubleshooting tool from the ODE CD that ships with your
server. ODE CDs are platform-specific for PA-RISC servers.
149
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting System Power
Troubleshooting System Power
This section provides information and procedures for troubleshooting system power.
Using the Front Panel Power Button
The server power button on the front panel operates differently, depending on how long the button is held in
and on what the system is doing when the button is pressed. You must be aware of its uses to properly
troubleshoot the system.
Table 5-1 shows the power button functions.
Table 5-1
Power Button Functions
System State
Switch Pressed Time
Result
Turns system power on.
Power connected to power
supplies, system power off
One second or less
More than one second
No effect.
No effect.
System at ISL
Less than one second
More than one second but
less than five seconds
Not used. This selection initiates E-buzzer
functions that are not supported in the
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
More than five seconds
Less than one second
Hard shutdown.
Hard shutdown.
System at BCH
Power on, OS shut down
OS running
More than one second but
less than five seconds
Not used. This selection initiates E-buzzer
functions that are not supported in the
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
More than five seconds
Less than one second
Hard shutdown
No effect
More than one second but
less than five seconds
Not used. This selection initiates E-buzzer
functions that are not supported in the
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers
More than five seconds
Less than one second
Hard shutdown.
No effect.
More than one second but
less than five seconds
Not used. This selection initiates E-buzzer
functions that are not supported in the
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
More than five seconds
Hard shutdown.
System Does Not Successfully Power On and Remain Powered On
f the system does not successfully power on and remain powered on, follow these steps:
•
If the system powers on and remains powered on – but does not enter or pass POST and boot to the BCH
or the iLO MP menu.
150
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting System Power
•
The cause of this problem is not apparent from the iLO MP’s SEL or the FPL logs. If both these conditions
Consider the following assumptions before troubleshooting system power:
•
The problem is a solid failure event (it happens every time you attempt to power on the system or initiate
POST).
•
There is a functioning console terminal (or a PC with appropriate terminal emulation) available and
attached to the iLO MP console port.
To perform the power-on troubleshooting procedure, follow these steps:
Step 1. If this is the first time the system has been powered on, check the incoming ac line voltage. Ensure
that you have 200 to 240 VAC power applied to the power supplies. The rp4410 and rp4440 servers
require 200 VAC nominal (for example, they will not operate on 100/120 VAC). Typical iLO MP SEL
entries when attempting to run on 100/120 VAC are as follows:
Alert Level 7: Fatal
Event Log Viewer Menu:
Keyword: Type-02 096f02 618242
A/C Failed, disconnected, or out of range
Logged by: Baseboard Management Controller
Sensor: Power Unit -AC Presence
Data1: 240VA Power Down
0x20430F39B1020040 FFFF026FCF090300
Step 2. Check the front panel power LED visible through the hole in the flap covering the power button.
•
•
If it is flashing amber, housekeeping voltages are available. Go to step 3.
If it is not illuminated or flashing, housekeeping voltages are not available. Check the LEDs on
the power supplies. The power supplies have three LED indicators: a Predict Fail amber LED to
the left, a Failed amber LED in the center (a triangle with an exclamation point), and a green
Power LED to the right. If the Failed LED is illuminated, you must replace the power supply. If
the green Power LED is illuminated or flashing, the supply is OK and has ac voltage applied.
Step 3. Verify whether the iLO MP is functional.
The iLO MP is typically accessed through a terminal attached to the iLO MP LAN port on the rear
bulkhead using a Ctrl-B CRkey sequence. If the iLO MP is functional, check the status of the dc
power system using the CM> PCcommand or the CM> PScommand. If the PCor PScommand output
shows the current system power state to be off, try to turn the dc power ON using the PCcommand.
If the system does not turn the dc power on, or if it does not remain on, check the SEL for errors as
described below. Alternatively, you can press the power button (located behind the front bezel flap)
to attempt to enable the dc voltages.
Step 4. If a terminal attached to the iLO MP LAN port does not respond to a Ctrl-B CR key sequence (and
the terminal is running at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit, Xon/Xoff, and is online), the
iLO MP might be hung or nonfunctional. Check the following LEDs located inside the system:
•
The iLO MP heartbeat LED.
This green LED is located between the 3.3 and 5 volt VRMs on the I/O baseboard assembly and
151
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting System Power
is visible from rear of the system by looking through the holes in the sheet metal directly above
the iLO MP LAN connector. The iLO MP heartbeat LED is on the left, closest to the power
supplies. This LED flashes at 1 Hz whenever housekeeping voltages are available and the iLO
MP circuitry is functional. If it is not flashing (or is solid green), the iLO MP circuitry might be
nonfunctional or is not receiving housekeeping voltages.
•
The BMC heartbeat LED.
This LED is located immediately to the right (from rear view) of the iLO MP heartbeat LED. It
flashes green at 1 Hz whenever ac power is applied to the system, minimum housekeeping
voltages are available, and the BMC circuitry is functional. If it is not flashing, the BMC
circuitry might be nonfunctional or the internal housekeeping voltages are missing.
•
•
If the iLO MP heartbeat LED is not flashing but the BMC heartbeat is flashing, replace the I/O
baseboard:
If the BMC heartbeat LED is not flashing but the iLO MP heartbeat is flashing:
— Replace the I/O baseboard.
— Replace the midplane board.
•
If neither heartbeat LED is flashing, internal dc housekeeping voltages might be missing.
Housekeeping voltages (12_STBY) are generated by the power supplies and passed through the
dc power distribution board, attached ribbon cable, and midplane board to the I/O baseboard.
— Replace the dc power distribution board.
— Replace the midplane board.
— Replace the flat gray cable between the dc power distribution and midplane.
— Replace the I/O baseboard.
If the iLO MP LAN terminal port responds to a Ctrl-B prompt, first examine the iLO MP System Logs (SL)
and look at the SEL for any recent alerts that have an alert level of 3 or greater before replacing any
hardware.
To look at the SEL, follow these steps:
Step 1. Select TEXTmode and set the alert level to 3.
Step 2. If there are many entries in the SEL logs and you are not sure which ones are associated with the
current problem, clear the iLO MP logs.
TIP
Store the entries somewhere else first and recreate the failure.
Step 3. Look at the SEL logs again.
Step 4. If the SEL logs do not assist in determining the root cause of the problem, go on to “System
System Build-Up Troubleshooting
To perform the system build-up troubleshooting procedure, follow these steps:
Step 1. Remove all the ac power cords from the power supplies.
152
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting System Power
Step 2. Remove the processor extender board, memory extender board, disk drives, I/O cards (if possible)
and plug the ac power cords into the power supplies. The iLO MP comes on and lists the following
CM> DFCRU IDs The following Alert Event might also appear:
CRU IDs:
--------
0002-Power Converter 0003-Power Supply 0
0005-Diagnostic Panel 0006-Front Panel
0004-Power Supply 1
0000-Motherboard
Log Entry 4: 00:00:09
Alert Level 5: Critical
Keyword: Type-02 257100 2453760
Missing CRU device - Mem Extender
Logged by: Baseboard Management Controller;
Sensor: Entity Presence
0x2000000009020050 FF01807115250300
If you do not see all of the CRU IDs, concentrate on the missing CRU IDs.
NOTE
A defective midplane board can cause power on or dc voltage problems. If you do not
get the above alert level 5 event, but get another high level alert, replace the
midplane board.
If you do show the above CRU ID entries and get the alert level 5 Missing CRU device - Mem
Extender event, add the memory extender board with at least one quad of DIMMs.
Step 3. Observe the amber power LED flashing and the red fault system LED flashing.
The output of the DFcommand for a system with two quads of DIMMS installed is as follows:
CRU IDs:
--------
0152-DIMM0D
0001-Mem Extender
0004-Power Supply 1
0128-DIMM0A
0002-Power Converter
0005-Diagnostic Panel
0136-DIMM0B
0003-Power Supply 0
0006-Front Panel
0144-DIMM0C
0160-DIMM1A
0168-DIMM1B
0176-DIMM1C
0184-DIMM1D
0000-Motherboard
The high level alerts listed were generated in the SEL logs. For example:
Log Entry
3: 23 DEC 2006 21:50:43
Alert Level 5: Critical
Keyword: Type-02 257100 2453760
Missing CRU device - CPU 0 PIROM
Logged by: Baseboard Management Controller;
153
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting System Power
Sensor: Entity Presence
0x2041CB3DB3020040 FF20807115250300
If all of the CRU IDs do not appear, note the missing CRU ID. If CRU ID entries and the Alert Level
5 Missing CRU device - CPU 0 PIROM appear, go to the next step.
Step 4. Insert the processor extender board.
NOTE
For this example, the processors were not removed from the processor extender board
first. Also, this example shows the expected results for an rp4440 system with two
processor modules installed. HP recommends having at least one processor module
installed (Module 0), or slightly different Alert Messages can appear.
The system fans come on and stay on when you add the processor extender board and processors.
The DFcommand output appears as follows:
CRU IDs:
--------
0001-Mem Extender
0004-Power Supply 1
0002-Power Converter 0003-Power Supply 0
0005-Diagnostic Panel 0006-Front Panel
0007-Disk Management 0008-Disk Backplane
0010-Processor Board
0032-CPU 0 PIROM
0012-Power Pod 0
0033-CPU 1 PIROM
0128-DIMM0A
0013-Power Pod 1
0036-Processor 0 RAM 0037-Processor 1 RAM
0136-DIMM0B
0160-DIMM1A
0184-DIMM1D
0144-DIMM0C
0168-DIMM1B
0000-Motherboard
0152-DIMM0D
0176-DIMM1C
Step 5. If all the installed hardware is functional, the system initiates POST. Go immediately into the SEL
Live Logs or the VFP to ensure that POST is initiated and proceeds without error to BCH. For the
rp4440 server, you do not normally see any POST forward progress messages on the console unless
you are in SL live mode.
Step 6. If POST does not start after five to ten seconds, suspect a problem with the processor extender
board or the processors mounted on it. Typical symptoms of this problem are an FRB2 hang alert
appearing in the SEL. Perform the following steps:
a. Reduce the processors to one module in position 0 and retest.
b. Replace the CPU module or swap the CPU module with one previously removed and try
replacing the processor extender board.
NOTE
A switch on the processor extender board determines whether it runs Itanium or
PA-RISC code. Be sure to check this switch position if you get an FRB2 hang and
have previously replaced the processor extender board as part of the
troubleshooting procedure.
For the rp4440 server, this switch (switch block S5103 lowest-most switch block
when viewed with extractor handles toward you) must be set to the right
(PA-RISC).
This switch position setting is normally physically stamped on the sheet metal
cover for convenience.
154
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools
Step 7. If you get any other error at this point, re-examine the SEL events and see if they point to the root
cause. If the SEL logs do not assist in pointing to the root cause, HP recommends that you get the
assistance of a systems expert.
Operating System Boots
If your operating system is running and you are experiencing problems, use the following online tools to help
solve your problem:
•
•
•
Support Tools Manager (STM)
Event Monitoring Service (EMS)
iLO MP
Operating System Does Not Boot
If the operating system does not boot, but you can reach the BCH from either the main disk partition or CD,
use the following offline tools to help solve your problem:
•
•
Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE)
iLO MP
Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools
The following online support tools are available from the HP-UX environment.
Support Tools Manager
Support Tools Manager (STM) is available in three user interfaces:
•
•
•
GUI for X-based terminals (XSTM)
Menu interface for ASCII terminals (MSTM)
Command-line interface for all ASCII terminals (CSTM)
You can use the GUI and menu interfaces intuitively and you can use the command-line interface to drive
STM using scripts.
You can use diagnostics to thoroughly test a device and isolate failures down to the suspected self-repair unit.
Find complete documentation on how to access and use STM on the web at:
http://docs.hp.com
Under the Topics menu, go to Diagnostics and look for Support Tools Manager.
155
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools
Event Monitoring Service
Event Monitoring Service (EMS) is the framework for monitoring hardware and reporting events. Use EMS
to eliminate most undetected hardware failures that cause data loss or interruptions of system operation. You
can monitor a hardware device (such as a disk) for any unusual activity (called an event). When an event
occurs, it is reported by a variety of notification methods, such as email. Event detections are handled
automatically with minimal involvement on your part.
The following monitors are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
CMC monitor
UPS monitor
FC hub monitor
FC switch monitor
Peripheral status monitor
Memory monitor
EMS comes with the HP-UX operating system. To bring up the event monitoring Main Menu, run the
following command at the shell prompt:
/etc/opt/resmon/lbin/monconfig
From the list of Main Menu selections, select the following:
(E) Enable Monitoring
iLO MP
For complete information on the iLO MP see the HP Integrity and HP 9000 Integrated Lights-Out (iLO)
Management Processor Operations Guide.
The following information provides iLO MP troubleshooting procedures.
Accessing the iLO MP Interface and System Logs
To access the iLO MP interface and system logs, follow these steps:
Step 1. Press Ctrl+B to access the MP interface.
Step 2. Log in with proper user name and password.
Step 3. Enter clto display the console logs. This log displays console history from oldest to newest.
Step 4. Enter slto display the system logs. The system logs consist of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
SEL
Forward progress log
Current boot log
Previous boot log
Live events log
SEL
To access the SEL, follow these steps:
156
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools
Step 1. Access the iLO MP command prompt.
Step 2. Enter the slcommand. The Event Log Viewer menu displays the following:
SL
Event Log Viewer Menu:
Log Name
Entries
% Full
Latest Timestamped Entry
-------------------------------------------------------------------
E - System Event
F - Forward Progress
B - Current Boot
P - Previous Boot
C - Clear All Logs
L - Live Events
39
1307
299
0
3 %
32 %
99 %
01 Nov 2004 17:15:03
Enter menu item or [Ctrl-B] to Quit:
Step 3. Enter eto review the events. The Event Log Navigation menu appears:
Log Name
Entries
% Full
Latest Timestamped Entry
-------------------------------------------------------------------
E - System Event
39
3 %
01 Nov 2004 17:15:03
Event Log Navigation Help:
+
View next block
(forward in time, e.g. from 3 to 4)
-
View previous block (backward in time, e.g. from 3 to 2)
Continue to the next or previous block
Dump the entire log for capture and analysis
First entry
<CR>
D
F
L
Last entry
J
Jump to entry number
H
K
T
A
View mode configuration - hex
View mode configuration - keyword
View mode configuration - text
Alert Level Filter options
U
Alert Level Unfiltered
?
Display this Help menu
Q
Quit and return to the Event Log Viewer Menu
Exit command and return to the MP Main Menu
Ctrl-B
Step 4. Enter tto select text mode.
Step 5. Enter dto dump the log to the screen. (If desired, save this file for reference.)
Step 6. To decode the blinking state of the system LED, review the entire SEL and look at events with alert
level 3 and above.
For example:
Log Entry 24: 14 Feb 2003 15:27:02
Alert Level 3: Warning
Keyword: Type-02 1b0800 1771520
Hot Swap Cage: SCSI cable removed
157
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools
Logged by: BMC; Sensor: Cable / Interconnect - SCSI ChExt Cable
Data1: Device Removed/Device Absent
0x203E4D0AC6020220 FFFF0008F61B0300
Log Entry 73: 00:00:12
Alert Level 3: Warning
Keyword: Type-02 050301 328449
The server's built-in sensors have detected an open chassis door.
Logged by: BMC; Sensor: Physical Security - Chassis Open
Data1: State Asserted
0x200000000C020570 FFFF010302050300
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools
Use the ODE CD to troubleshoot your HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server by accessing the offline diagnostic
environment (ODE).
ODE
Use the ODE to evaluate specific hardware components using a command line interface. To access ODE from
your ODE CD, follow these steps:
Step 1. Power on the server and insert the ODE CD.
Step 2. Boot the system to the PDC prompt (BOOTADMIN, BCH, and so on). PDC prompts can differ on
some computer models. For example:
Main Menu: Enter command or menu>
Step 3. List the bootable devices by entering search: search
Step 4. Select the CD device that contains the ODE CD. For example:
p3
Step 5. Boot from that device by entering boot p3:
boot p3
Step 6. You are asked to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) prompt. Enter yes:
y
Step 7. From the ISL prompt, start the Offline Diagnostics Environment by entering ODE:
ODE
158
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools
Table 5-2 lists the ODE commands that are available at the ODE prompt.
Table 5-2 ODE Commands
Command
Description
help
Displays a list and description of the available commands.
Displays additional information about the command.
Displays additional information about the variable.
Lists the ODE modules that run on your computer.
Runs an ODE module interactively.
help<command>
help<var>
ls
<module_name>
run<module_name>
Runs an ODE module noninteractively.
159
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools
Troubleshooting PCI/PCI-X Hot-Pluggable Operations
Sometimes a PCI/PCI-X card does not come online during hot-plugging due to a frequency mismatch between
the PCI/PCI-X card and the slot bus, or due to other hardware errors. To determine the type of error you are
experiencing, interpret the LED display described as follows.
Figure 5-1 shows the PCI/PCI-X LEDs.
Figure 5-1
PCI/PCI-X LEDs
PCI-X Slot
Numbers
PCI-X Slot
Attention
LEDs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PCI-X Slot
Attention
Buttons
Between LEDs
PCI-X Slot
Attention
LEDs
PCI-X Slot
Power LEDs
PCI/PCI-X Bus Mode or Frequency Mismatch
After you insert a PCI/PCI-X card into the slot and push the attention button, the power LED goes from
blinking to steady off and stays at steady off. This means that the system firmware has rejected the
PCI/PCI-X card and indicates either bus-frequency or bus-mode mismatch.
160
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
NOTE
After pushing the attention button, ensure that you wait the full five second operation
cancellation window before taking further action.
Hardware Operation Fault
A hardware operation fault is usually caused by an incorrectly seated or defective PCI/PCI-X card. If this
occurs, the attention LED turns steady on and the power LED turns steady off.
CAUTION
If the power draw for the newly installed PCI/PCI-X card is excessive when combined with that
of the existing PCI/PCI-X expansion cards, the server powers off. If this occurs, check the power
ratings of all installed PCI/PCI-X cards. A known cause of power loss is the use of more than
three PCI/PCI-X RAID cards in the system.
If the PCI/PCI-X card cannot be powered off during a hot-pluggable removal operation, the attention button
turns steady on and the power LED remains steady-on. A possible cause of this condition is that a user
application or process is using the card you are trying to remove. You can determine if the card is in use by
checking the operating system logs.
CAUTION
If your slot does not power off during a hot-pluggable removal operation, do not open the
manual retention latch (MRL) on the OLX divider. This action causes system failure or
operating system crashes.
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers have LED indicators located on the front control panel and an
internal QuickFind diagnostic panel that you can use to determine what repair action is required.
Front Control Panel LEDs
The front control panel LEDs display the system status at a glance. If warning or attention LEDs are
flashing, query the QuickFind diagnostic panel or iLO MP for further information.
161
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
Figure 5-2 shows the front control panel LEDs.
Figure 5-2
Front Control Panel LEDs
System LED
Power LED
Power Button
Disk LED
TOC/NMI Button
Thermal LED
Locator
Button/LED
Table 5-3 lists the front control panel LED definitions.
Table 5-3
Front Control Panel LED Definitions
LED/
Button
State
Flash Rate
Color
Green
Description
System LED Running
System LED Booting
Steady
System normal. OS up and running.
OS booting or at BCH.
Flashing at
0.5 Hz
Green
System LED Attention
Flashing at
1 Hz
Yellow
Warning. System needs attention.
Redundancy lost, component failure pending.
(Additional information can be found in the
System Log).
System LED Fault
System LED Off
Flashing at
2 Hz
Red
Hard fault, system halted.
Off
N/A
System off.
Power LED
Power LED
On
On
Steady
Green
Yellow
Power normal.
Flashing at
1 Hz
Housekeeping voltage present.
Power LED
Disk LED
Off
Off
Off
Power off.
Active
Flashing at
rate of disk
activity
Green
Disk activity.
Thermal
LED
OK
Steady
Green
Yellow
Blue
Thermal OK.
Thermal
LED
Warning
Active
Flashing at
1 Hz
Thermal warning.
Locator
LED/button
Flashing at
1 Hz
System locator LED can be remotely or
locally activated/deactivated.
162
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LEDs
The QuickFind diagnostic panel is located under the top cover and is attached to the top of the power supply
cage. The following definitions describe the status of the various LEDs and what is wrong with the indicated
component.
NOTE
LED behavior is based on firmware. For changes in LED behavior, see your server firmware
release notes.
Table 5-4 lists the QuickFind diagnostic panel LED definitions.
Table 5-4
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel LED Definitions
LED 0 LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
Item
Details
Processor
Socket 0 Socket 1 Socket 2 Socket 3 If the System LED (on front panel) is in the
attention or fault state and the processor LED
is on, then the processor or voltage regulator
has failed—the processor module in the
specified socket needs to be replaced.
If the thermal LED is in the warning or critical
state and the processor LED is on, then the
processor exceeded the warning or critical level
Subsystem
CPU
board
Memory I/O
n/a
A soldered voltage regulator has failed—the
specified board must be replaced
board
n/a
n/a
1
board
I/O VRM
n/a
n/a
0
n/a
n/a
2
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
CPU VRM
Fan module
One or both fans in a fan module have
failed—the module must be replaced.
Fan 2 is in front of the power supplies
Memory
bank X (0-7) xA
DIMM
DIMM
xB
DIMM
xC
DIMM
xD
The specified DIMM has failed—the DIMM
must be replaced
If all the LEDs for a rank (0-7) are lit and the
memory config error LED is lit, then the
DIMMs in the specified rank are
mismatched—replace mismatched DIMM
Check
power
supply
n/a
n/a
n/a
One of the power supplies or power supply fans
have failed—replace the power supply. The
faulty power supply LED (located on power
supply) lights
Memory
config error
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
The DIMMs in a rank are mismatched. All the
DIMMs in the specified rank (0-7) lights
Processor
config error
The processors are mismatched—replace
mismatched processor
Missing
component
A required component(s) is not installed in the
system and thus preventing power up
System
temp
The internal temperature of the server has
exceeded the warning or critical level
Check event n/a
log
An event has occurred that requires attention
163
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
Figure 5-3 shows the QuickFind diagnostic panel.
Figure 5-3
QuickFind Diagnostic Panel
Processor
Subsystem
I/O VRM
CPU VRM
Fan
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
Power Supply
Memory Config Error
Processor Config Error
Missing Component
System Temperature
Check Event Log
164
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
I/O Baseboard LED Indicators
Figure 5-4 shows the LEDs, sensors, and reset or attention buttons on the I/O baseboard.
Figure 5-4
I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors
Battery
3.3 VSB
Power
LED
BMC
Reset
Button
12V VRM LED
PCI-XAttention
LED
iLO MP
ROM
LED
PCI-X Attention
Button
5V VRM
LED
PCI-X Power LED
MP Soft
Reset
Button
iLO MP
Self-Test
iLO MP Heartbeat LED
BMC Heartbeat LED
3.3V VRM LED
Locator Button/LED
PCI-X
Attention LED
165
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
Table 5-5 lists the I/O baseboard LEDs, buttons, and sensors.
Table 5-5
I/O Baseboard LEDs, Buttons, and Sensors
LED/Button
Color
Status
On
Condition
12V VRM is functioning.
12V VRM Power LED
5V VRM Power LED
3.3V VRM Power LED
iLO MP heartbeat
Green
Green
Green
Green
Amber
On
5V VRM is functioning.
On
3.3V VRM is functioning.
Blinking
On
The iLO MP is functioning correctly.
The iLO MP is executing the internal self test.
iLO MP Self Test LED
Off
The iLO MP has passed the internal self test.
The BMC is functioning correctly.
Standby power is available.
BMC Heartbeat
Green
Green
Blinking
On
3.3 VSB Power LED
iLO MP Soft Reset Button N/A
Press
Resets the iLO MP values.
Memory Extender Boards
The 32-DIMM memory extender board has two power status LEDs, 1.25 V and 1.5 V (Figure 5-5). When the
LEDs are on, each respective voltage is present on the memory extender board.
The 16-DIMM memory extender board has one condition LED on each of the two VRMs. If either condition
VRM LED is on, there is a problem with that VRM. You must replace the entire extender board in this case;
the VRMs are not customer self-repair units.
166
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
Figure 5-5 shows the 32-DIMM memory extender board LEDs.
Figure 5-5
32-DIMM Memory Extender Board LEDs
1.25 V LED
1.5 V LED
Table 5-6 lists the 32-DIMM memory extender board LED states.
Table 5-6
32-DIMM Memory Extender Board LED States
LED
Color
Status
Condition
1.25 V power
1.5 V power
Green
Green
On
On
Power OK
Power OK
167
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators
Figure 5-6 shows the 16-DIMM memory extender board LEDs.
Figure 5-6
16-DIMM Memory Extender Board LEDs
VRM LEDs
Table 5-7 lists the 16-DIMM memory extender board LED states.
Table 5-7
16-DIMM Memory Extender Board LED States
LED
Color
Status
Condition
Action
VRM status
Green
On
VRM is bad
Replace memory extender board
168
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Disk and I/O Path Logging
Disk and I/O Path Logging
Some failures result in I/O path logging. These paths help to indicate the source of the error and can be
included in the error message or logged into console or event logs.
Table 5-8
Internal Disk and DVD Paths
Function
Associated
with Path
Slot
Location
Paths
Disk slot 1
(SCSI ID = 0)
SCSI I/O for bottom
removable disk
Bottom disk
Top disk
0/1/1/0.0.0 (simplex mode)
0/1/1/1.0.0 Channel B (duplex mode)
Disk slot 2
(SCSI ID = 1)
SCSI I/O for top
removable disk
0/1/1/0.1.0 Channel A (duplex mode)
0/0/3/0.0
DVD slot
IDE I/O for DVD
DVD slot
Table 5-9 lists the extended core I/O paths for the core I/O slot.
Table 5-9 Extended Core I/O Paths
Function
Associated
with Path
Location
Paths
RS-232 connector port
(communications controller)
Rear-panel bulkhead connector (labeled MP local and
auxiliary)
0/0/1/0
MP local and remote ports
(serial controller)
Rear-panel bulkhead connector (labeled Remote)
0/0/1/1
Ultra 3 (U160/320) external
SCSI port
Rear-panel SCSI connector (upper connector)
0/1/1/1.x.y
USB port
Upper rear-panel bulkhead connector (labeled USB1)
Lower rear-panel bulkhead connector (labeled USB2)
On I/O baseboard
0/0/2/0
0/0/2/1
0/0/3/0
0/0/4/0
USB port
IDE controller
VGA controller
Rear-panel bulkhead connector (labeled VGA)
Table 5-10 lists the PCI I/O paths.
Table 5-10
PCI I/O Paths
Function
Associated
with Path
Slot
Location
ACPI Paths
Slot 1 (core I/O SCSI) Ultra 160/320 dual
SCSI channel
Left-most slot (nearest to
center of baseboard)
0/1/1/0 Channel A
0/1/1/1 Channel B
169
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Disk and I/O Path Logging
Table 5-10
PCI I/O Paths (Continued)
Function
Associated
with Path
Slot
Location
ACPI Paths
Slot 2 (core I/O LAN)
Slot 3
Gigabit LAN
2nd from left
0/1/2
0/1/2/1 (dual-port LAN only)
I/O with 66 MHz/
64-bit PCI-X card
(shared with slot 4)
3rd from left
4th from left
5th from left
6th from left
7th from left
0/4/1
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
I/O with 66 MHz/
64-bit PCI-X card
(shared with slot 3)
0/4/2
0/5/1
0/5/2
0/2/1
I/O with 66 MHz/
64-bit PCI-X card
(shared with slot 6)
I/O with 66 MHz/
64-bit PCI-X card
(shared with slot 5)
Slot 7
I/O with 133 MHz/
64-bit PCI-X card
Slot 8 (right)
I/O with 133 MHz/
64-bit PCI-X card
Right-most slot (nearest to 0/6/1
edge of baseboard)
170
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Core I/O Connections
Core I/O Connections
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers include the following core I/O connections:
•
•
Two USB ports
One iLO MP
— One 10/100 LAN-RJ45
— Three serial ports
SCSI HBA
•
— The SCSI HBA board is used to attach SCSI external mass storage to the system.
— Connections to the SCSI board include the external SCSI channels for external mass storage devices.
CAUTION
Some restrictions apply to external mass storage devices that you can connect to Channel B
of the core I/O SCSI HBA. External connections to Channel B of the SCSI HBA controller
are only supported in simplex configuration, when the internal cable between the SCSI
backplane and the SCSI HBA card is disconnected. If the server is converted to the duplex
configuration, you cannot connect external SCSI devices to Channel B of the SCSI HBA.
•
LAN Connection
— The LAN board provides the basic external I/O connectivity for the system.
— Connections to the LAN card include one or two 10/100/1000 Base-T LAN RJ45 connectors.
— New cards might be available for use in the server. See the available cards on the web at:
http://hp.com.
171
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
System I/O Board Switches and Jumpers
System I/O Board Switches and Jumpers
The following descriptions are for reference only.
Serial Number
PCI-X Slot 8
PCI-X Slot 7
PCI-X Slot 6
PCI-X Slot 5
PCI-X Slot 4
PCI-X Slot 3
PCI-X Slot 2
PCI-X Slot 1
DS0805
DS1810
DS1811
DS2807
DS2808
DS3808
DS0806
DS1808
S0801
S1802
S1803
S2801
S2802
S3802
DS1813
DS2809
DS2806
DS3809
BMC
DUART
Locator Button
S4903
U5202
Light Sensor
DS5501
P5603
12 Volts
3.3 Volts
DS5808
P5301
ON
RANGE
MFG
DS5815
J6305
BMC HB
Battery
MP HB
CONS
MUX
DS5816
DS5809
J5604
P5401
5
Volts
J6921
VGA
J6607
DS6113
Ejection Lever Latch
JD7901
REMOTE/
CONSOLE
MP JTAG
VIDEO
BIOS
DS8816
J8906
AUX
P8204
P8412
MANUAL PON
LPC BUS
ACPI
EVENTS
J9905
LOCAL
J8611
J9602
J9503
DS9906
BMC IPMB
J9803
MP SRESET
P9505
172
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
System I/O Board Switches and Jumpers
Table 5-11 lists the system I/O board indicators, connectors, and jumpers.
Table 5-11 System I/O Board Indicators, Connectors, and Jumpers
LED Indicators
Connectors
Jumpers
Reference
Designator
Reference
Designator
Reference
Designator
Function
Function
Function
ac range off
DS0907
DS0805
DS0806
DS1922
DS1810
Slot 8 attention
P2314
Dual Hot-Plug
Controller JTAG
P5704
Slot 8 attention
Slot 8 power
P4506
P5301
P5603
J6607
BMC Dual
UART
P5705
P5708
P8412
Console mux-off
12 V VRM
module
Manufacturing/
Schmoo-off
Slot 7 attention
Slot 7 attention
3.3 V VRM
module
Manual power
on/off
5 V VRM module S5102 Pos 1
VGA enable Off
for the rp4410/
rp4440
DS1808
Slot 7 power
J6305
PDH monitor
connector
S5102 Pos 2
N/A
DS1921
DS1811
DS1813
DS2917
DS2807
DS2809
DS2918
DS2808
DS2806
DS3916
Slot 6 attention
Slot 6 attention
Slot 6 power
P5401
J5604
P6406
P6407
J7605
P7502
P7503
P8204
P8304
J9503
RiLoe connector
Scan connector
BMC JTAG
S5102 Pos 3
S5102 Pos 4
S5103 Pos 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Slot 5 attention
Slot 5 attention
Slot 5 power
BMC test header S5103 Pos 2
iLO MP JTAG S5103 Pos 3
12C bus 2 header S5103 Pos 4
12C bus 1 header N/A
Slot 4 attention
Slot 4 attention
Slot 4 power
ACPI events
N/A
N/A
LPC bus header
Slot 3 attention
iLO MP data bus N/A
debug header
DS3808
DS3809
DS5501
Slot 3 attention
Slot 3 power
12 V power
J98611
J9602
P9505
iLO MP data bus N/A
debug header
N/A
N/A
N/A
iLO MP data bus N/A
debug header
IPMB bus
N/A
between BMC
and iLO MP
173
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
System I/O Board Switches and Jumpers
Table 5-11
System I/O Board Indicators, Connectors, and Jumpers (Continued)
Connectors Jumpers
Reference
LED Indicators
Reference
Designator
Reference
Function
Function
Function
Designator
Designator
DS5808
3.3 V power
J9803
Core I/O debug
connector
N/A
N/A
DS6113
DS5809
3.3 VSB power
5 V power
J2001
J6002
Left fan (fan 0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Middle fan (fan
1)
DS5815
DS5816
BMC heartbeat
J7001
J6004
Right fan (fan 2)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
iLO MP
heartbeat
High-speed
backplane for
ropes
DS8816
DS9906
N/A
iLO MP ROM
error
J7003
High-speed
backplane for
ropes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
iLO MP self test J7002
High-speed
backplane for
ropes
N/A
N/A
J9006
J5910
Low-speed
backplane for
ropes
N/A
Dual USB and
iLO MP card
LAN
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
J6921
DB-15 analog
video
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
JD7901
DB-9
remote/console
RS-232
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
J8906
J9905
J6502
DB-9 auxillary
RS-232
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
DB-9 local
RS-232
Frequency input
for margin
174
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Removing and Replacing Components
This chapter describes how to remove and replace hardware in the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers. Use
care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing these procedures. Voltages can be present
within the server. Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge.
This chapter addresses the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
175
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Safety Information
Safety Information
Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing removal and replacement procedures.
Voltages might be present within the server. Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic
discharge.
Follow the procedures listed below to ensure safe handling of components, to prevent injury, and to prevent
damage to the server:
•
•
When removing or installing a hot-swappable item, follow the instructions provided in this guide.
If installing a hot-swappable or hot-pluggable component when power is applied (fans are running),
reinstall the server cover immediately to prevent overheating.
•
•
If installing a hot-pluggable component, complete the required software intervention before removing the
component.
If installing an assembly that is not hot-swappable nor hot-pluggable, disconnect the power cable from the
external power receptacle before proceeding.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been
disconnected from the server before working with the server.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac
power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power
switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
•
•
•
Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other items.
Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build-up, such as wool or synthetic materials.
If installing an internal assembly, wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat, such as those
included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP part number 9300-1155).
•
Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or
any electrical components on accessory boards.
Required Service Tools
Service of this product may require one or more of the following tools:
•
•
•
Electrically Conductive Field Service Kit (HP part number 9300-1155)
1/4 inch flat blade screwdriver
ACX-15 Torx screwdriver
176
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Accessing a Rack-Mounted Server
Accessing a Rack-Mounted Server
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers are designed to be rack mounted. The following procedure explains
how to gain access to the server that is mounted in an approved rack. For rack installation instructions,
review the document titled Installation Guide, Mid-Weight Slide Kit, 5065-7291. This document can be
accessed at:
http://www.hp.com/racksolutions
WARNING
Ensure that all antitip features are employed before extending the server (front and
rear antitip feet installed; adequate ballast properly placed; and so on).
Extend the Server from the Rack
NOTE
Ensure that there is enough area (Approximately 1.5 meters [4.5 ft]) to fully extend the server
out the front and work on it.
To extend the server from the rack, follow these steps:
Step 1. Remove the 25-mm Torx screws that fasten the server to the rack.
Figure 6-1
Accessing T-25 Screws
T-25 Screws
177
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Accessing a Pedestal-Mounted Server
Step 2. Flip out the two pull handles at either end of the front bezel and slowly pull the unit forward by the
handles. The server is fully extended when the rail clips are locked in place. When fully extended,
the front and top covers are fully accessible.
Inserting the Server Into the Rack
To insert the server into the rack, follow these steps:
Step 1. Press the rail clips on either side of the server inward and push the server into the rack until it
stops.
Step 2. Replace the T-25 screws that fasten the server to the rack.
Accessing a Pedestal-Mounted Server
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers are also designed for use in a stand-alone pedestal (rackless)
environment. A pedestal is available for use with the server in a floor- or pedestal-mount configuration.
You do not need to remove the pedestal from the server to gain access to internal components.
The front bezel, front cover, and top cover can be removed with the pedestal attached to the server.
178
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Accessing a Pedestal-Mounted Server
WARNING
Ensure that the server is properly grounded when performing remove-and-replace
procedures. Use an antistatic wrist strap and grounding mat similar to those found
in the HP Electrically Conductive Field Service Kit.
Figure 6-2
Pedestal-Mounted Server
179
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Front Bezel
Front Bezel
The server does not need to be powered off to remove the front bezel. The front control panel access door is on
the bezel.
Opening the control panel door provides access to the following components:
•
•
Power button
System LEDs
Removing the Front Bezel
Remove the front bezel by grasping the outer edges of the front bezel and pulling straight out.
Figure 6-3
Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel
Replacing the Front Bezel
Replace the front bezel by pushing the front bezel straight into the chassis until it snaps into place.
180
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Front and Top Covers
Front and Top Covers
CAUTION
Do not operate the server without the front and top covers in place. Operation of the server
without the front and top covers in place makes the server susceptible to electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and overheating problems that result in system failure.
Observe all electrostatic discharge (ESD) safety precautions before attempting this procedure.
Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
NOTE
When the front or top cover is removed, the chassis fan units increase to high speed to assist
cooling. When the top cover is replaced at the end of the operation, the chassis fans return to
normal speed.
Removing the Front Cover
CAUTION
Power the server off before removing the front cover. All components accessible behind the front
cover are cold-swappable and require power to be off.
To remove the front cover, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
181
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Front and Top Covers
Step 3. Using a Torx T15 driver, loosen the four captive thumbscrews that hold the front cover in place.
Figure 6-4 Removing and Replacing the Front Cover
Thumbscrews
Step 4. Raise the cover slightly, and pull the cover toward the front of the server to free the tabs from the
slots in the center of the chassis.
Replacing the Front Cover
To replace the front cover, follow these steps:
Step 1. Align the tabs at the rear of the front cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis. Fully seat
the tabs into the slots.
Step 2. Tighten the four thumbscrews securely.
Removing the Top Cover
To remove the top cover, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
182
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Front and Top Covers
Step 3. Pull the cover toward the rear of the server to free the tabs from the slots in the center of the
chassis and lift the cover straight up.
Figure 6-5
Removing and Replacing the Top Cover
Thumbscrews
Rear of Chassis
Replacing the Top Cover
To replace the top cover, follow these steps:
Step 1. Align the tabs at the rear of the top cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis. Fully seat the
tabs into the slots, and push forward until it seats.
Step 2. Using a Torx T15 driver, tighten the two thumbscrews securely.
183
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Memory Extender Board
Memory Extender Board
The memory extender board is located directly under the front cover of the chassis. The standard memory
extender board can hold up to 16 DIMMs. The optional high capacity memory extender board can hold up to
32 DIMMs.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing a memory extender board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing a Memory Extender Board
To remove a memory extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
NOTE
The memory extender board can be removed without removing the server from the
rack.
184
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Memory Extender Board
Step 5. Pull on the extraction levers to unplug the memory extender board from the socket located on the
midplane riser board and remove the memory extender board from the chassis.
Figure 6-7 Memory Extender Board
Replacing the Memory Extender Board
To replace the memory extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Ensure that the extraction levers are in the outward, unlocked position.
Step 2. Align the memory extender board with the front and rear chassis guide slots.
Step 3. Slide the memory extender board in until it begins to seat in the socket located on the midplane
board.
Step 4. Push the extraction levers inward to the locked position to fully plug the memory extender board
into the midplane riser board.
186
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs
System Memory DIMMs
System memory DIMMs are located on the memory extender board.
Replacing Deallocated Memory Ranks
This section provides the steps necessary to replace deallocated memory ranks.
NOTE
When replacing deallocated memory ranks on a server with system firmware version 45.11 or
greater, you must perform the following procedure before replacing the deallocated memory.
This procedures is necessary to ensure that the memory is properly reallocated upon server
boot.
To ensure the repaired memory rank reallocates properly, follow these steps:
Step 1. Boot to BCH.
Step 2. Enter the in mecommand to view the deconfigured quad of memory.
Step 3. Enter the ser pdt clearcommand. The following message displays followed by a 30 second delay:
If DIMM replacement is necessary, power down the system now:
Use ^B MP:CM> PC -OFF -NC, then pull power cord and replace DIMM.
Otherwise, the system will automatically reboot in 30 seconds.
Step 4. You must remove power from the system within 30 seconds.
replacing the memory DIMM.
Removing Memory DIMMs
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing system memory DIMMs.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
To remove system memory, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
187
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs
NOTE
The memory extender board can be removed without removing the server from the
rack.
Step 5. Identify the DIMM to be removed and push the extraction levers found on either side of that DIMM
slot outward to the open position. The DIMM ejects from the slot.
Step 6. Remove the DIMM from the socket.
Installing Memory DIMMs
The standard configuration of HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers includes a 16-DIMM memory extender
board. This extender board must contain a minimum of one GB of memory (four 256 MB DIMMs loaded in
quad 0 [connectors 0A, 0B, 0C, and 0D]).
188
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs
Table 6-1 and Figure 6-8 show the filler requirements and slot IDs for the 16-DIMM memory extender board.
Table 6-1
DIMM Filler Requirements for 16-DIMM Memory Extender Board
Fillers Requireda
DIMMs Loaded
4 DIMMs in quad 0
Six fillers total:
Two fillers in each quad 1, 2, and 3
8 DIMMs in quads 0 and 1
12 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, and 2
16 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, and 3
Four fillers total:
Two fillers in each quad 2 and 3
Two fillers total:
Two fillers in quad 3
No fillers required
a. One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM connectors.
Figure 6-8
16-DIMM Memory Extender Board Slot IDs
An optional 32-DIMM memory extender board is available to replace the 16-DIMM memory extender board.
This extender board must contain a minimum of one GB of memory [four 256 MB DIMMs loaded in quad 0
(connectors 0A, 0B, 0C, and 0D)].
189
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs
Table 6-2 and Figure 6-9 show the filler requirements and slot IDs for the 32-DIMM memory extender board.
Table 6-2
DIMM Filler Requirements for 32-DIMM Memory Extender Board
DIMMs Loaded
Fillers requireda
4 DIMMs in quad 0
12 fillers total:
Two fillers in quads 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7
(quad 2 remains unfilled)
Eight fillers total:
8 DIMMs in quads 0 and 1
12 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, and 2
16 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, and 3
20 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4
Two fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7
(quads 2 and 3 remain unfilled)
Eight fillers total:
Two fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7
(quad 3 remains unfilled)
Eight fillers total:
Two fillers in quads 4, 5, 6, and 7
(all quads filled)
Four fillers total:
Two fillers in quads 5 and 7
quad 6 remains unfilled
No fillers required
No fillers required
No fillers required
24 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
28 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
32 DIMMs in quads 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7
a. One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM connectors.
Figure 6-9
32-DIMM Memory Extender Board Slot IDs
You can insert additional DIMMs into both 16- and 32- DIMM boards. When adding DIMMs, you must use a
minimum of four like sized DIMMs in the next available quad.
190
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
System Memory DIMMs
Supported DIMM Sizes
You can install up to 128 GB of memory in the server. Supported DIMM sizes are as follows:
256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB
•
Dissimilar DIMM sizes can be used across the extender board, but all four DIMMs in each quad must match.
For cooling purposes, DIMM fillers must be used in some unused connectors.
DIMM Slot Fillers
Both the 16- and 32-DIMM extender boards have DIMM slot filler boards placed over all unfilled DIMM
connectors. As you fill DIMM quads with additional memory you must remove the DIMM slot fillers covering
the affected connectors. All remaining DIMM fillers in unused connectors must remain in place to maximize
NOTE
One DIMM filler board covers two adjacent DIMM connectors. Remove DIMM slot fillers as you
add memory and the correct configuration will always remain.
Installing DIMMs
To install DIMMs, follow these steps:
Step 1. Align the DIMM with the socket located on the memory extender board; and align key in connector
with the notch in the DIMM.
Figure 6-10 Inserting DIMM into the Extender Board Connector
191
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Processor Extender Board
Step 2. Firmly and evenly push on each end of the DIMM until it seats in the socket. Ensure that the
extraction levers are in the closed position.
Step 3. Replace the memory extender board in the chassis. (See “Replacing the Memory Extender Board”
Processor Extender Board
The processor extender board is located under the front cover, directly beneath the memory extender board.
The processor extender board can hold one to four dual processor modules.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing the processor extender board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing the Processor Extender Board
To remove the processor extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
NOTE
You can remove the processor extender board without removing the server from the
rack.
Step 4. Press the latch on the extraction levers located on each side of the processor extender board.
192
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Processor Extender Board
Step 5. Pull out the extraction levers to unplug the processor extender board from the socket located on the
midplane riser board.
Figure 6-11
Processor Extender Board
193
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Processor Extender Board
Replacing the Processor Extender Board
CAUTION
Your processor extender board can be used in Itanium or PA-RISC based systems. A dipswitch
is provided to configure processor extender board circuits. Ensure that the dipswitch is set to
PA RISC for the HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 servers. If this switch is set incorrectly, the system
does not enter into power on self test (POST).
To replace the processor extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Position the processor extender board as in Figure 6-12. There are two switch blocks.
Figure 6-12 Dipswitch Location
Lower switch block
Step 2. Set the lower of the two blocks when the processor carrier is oriented with the extractor handles
toward you.
194
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Processor Extender Board
a. Set the dipswitch to the right (ON) position for PA-RISC. Do not disturb switch banks 1 through
4 beneath the sheet metal.
Figure 6-13 Dipswitch Setting for S5
Step 3. Align the processor extender board with the front and rear card guides.
Step 4. Slide the processor extender board down until it begins to seat in the socket located on the
midplane riser board.
Step 5. Push the extraction levers inward to the locked position in order to fully seat the processor extender
board into the socket on the midplane riser board.
Step 8. Verify processor operation by using the system utilities.
•
•
Use the iLO MP commands and the BCH commands to verify operation.
Use the MAKODIAGprovided by the offline diagnostic environment to exercise the processor.
195
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Replacing Dual Processor Modules
Replacing Dual Processor Modules
Dual processor modules are located on the top and bottom surfaces of the processor extender board.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing a processor.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Ensure that processor speed and cache size are identical for all processors. Failure to observe
this caution results in performance degradation or system failure.
The easiest way to ensure compatibility is to use dual processor modules with identical part
numbers.
Dual Processor Modules
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers use dual processor modules. That is, each module contains two
processors. When only one processor is activated (a 1P/1C configuration of the HP 9000 rp4410 server), the
second processor is installed but not enabled and is available for future use.
•
The HP 9000 rp4410 server may contain one or two dual processor modules to provide 1/1C, 1P/2C, or
2P/2C configurations.
•
The HP 9000 rp4440 server can contain one, two, three, or four dual processor modules to provide 1P/2C,
2P/2C, 3P/2C, or 4P/2C configurations.
If fewer than the maximum number of dual processor modules are to be installed, the modules must be
Processor Load Order
You can install up to four dual processor modules on the processor extender board, which is located under the
front cover in the top service bay, directly under the memory extender board. If fewer than the maximum
number of dual processor modules are to be installed (one in the HP 9000 rp4410 server or fewer than four in
the HP 9000 rp4440 server), they must be installed in the designated locations on the processor extender
board.
The connectors slots or sockets on the processor extender board are labeled CPU0 through CPU3. CPU0 and
CPU1 connectors are located on the top of the processor extender board and CPU2 and CPU3 connectors are
located on the bottom.
196
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Replacing Dual Processor Modules
Table 6-3 describes the load sequence.
Table 6-3 Processor Load Order
Dual
Processor
Module
Server
Socket
rp4410 or rp4440
rp4410 or rp4440
rp4440 only
1
2
3
4
CPU0
CPU1
CPU2
CPU3
rp4440 only
CAUTION
Change only the user-configurable settings of the dipswitches on the processor extender board.
Removing a Dual Processor Module
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing a processor.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
To remove a dual processor module from the processor extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 5. Unplug the processor cable from its socket on the extender board.
Step 6. Using a Torx T15 driver, loosen the four T15 shoulder screws and the two knurled thumbscrews
that attach the sequencer frame on the heatsink, until the sequencer frame is free.
Step 7. Remove the sequencer frame from the heatsink.
Step 8. Using a CPU Install Tool, unlock the assembly from the socket by rotating the cam on the socket
180 degrees counterclockwise.
Step 9. Ensure the cam on the processor socket lock is in the unlocked, counterclockwise position.
Step 10. Carefully remove the dual processor module from the processor socket. If protective pin covers are
available, install the cover on processor connectors to shield the connector pins. Place the dual
processor module in an antistatic container.
197
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Replacing Dual Processor Modules
Figure 6-14 Removing the Dual Processor Module from the Processor Extender
Board
The loosening sequence for 4-shoulder screws is 1, 2, 3, 4.
3
2 Knurled
Thumb-
1
CPU Install Tool
(releases shoulder
screws and
2
screws
4
thumbscrews)
2.5-mm Allen
Key
Power Cable (protected by
plastic sleeve)
Pins (aligned on
heatsink with
slots in frame)
Slots*
Slots*
*Slots shown are at
CPU1 socket
Processor shown is
mounted on CPU0
socket per CPU load
order
198
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Replacing Dual Processor Modules
Installing a Dual Processor Module
NOTE
Before installing a dual processor module into your system, read the following instructions
carefully and see Figure 6-18, “Installing Dual Processor Module on Processor Extender
Board,” for a complete understanding of this process.
To install a dual processor module on the processor extender board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Remove the processor extender board from the server and place it on an antistatic mat. (See
Step 2. Locate the socket (CPU0, CPU1, CPU2, or CPU3) where you will install the dual processor module
Figure 6-15 Locate the Socket in Processor Extender Board
CPU1
CPU0
CPU3 (under)
CPU2 (under)
Step 3. Ensure that the cam on the processor socket lock is in the unlocked, counterclockwise position.
Step 4. Remove any protective packaging from the processor module.
TIP
Protective covers can be installed to protect connector pins. Save covers for future
use.
Step 5. Inspect the pins of the processor to be installed. Verify that the processor pins are not bent.
199
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Replacing Dual Processor Modules
Step 6. Carefully lower the processor, without the sequencer frame, onto the processor socket. Align the
pins on the bottom of the heatsink to the slots in the retention frame on the extender board.
CAUTION
TIP
Do not press the processor modules into the socket. When properly assigned, the
processor pins seat into the socket by themselves. You can damage the pins if you
apply pressure.
Test the alignment of the assembly to the socket by gently moving the assembly back
and forth with the palm of your hand—feel little or no side play. However, because
the assembly is not yet tightened, it can tilt slightly toward the center of the
extender board—this is acceptable.
CAUTION
Before locking the processor assembly into its socket, ensure that the power cable is
not pinched between the heatsink and sheet metal frame of the extender board. Also,
ensure that the two power cable ends attached to the dual processor module do not
come unplugged from their sockets when you move the cable into place under the
Figure 6-16 shows the processor cable placed correctly under the heatsink.
Figure 6-16 Processor Cable Placed Correctly
Heatsink
Cable Placed Correctly
Under the Heatsink
Protective Plastic Sleeve
Sheet Metal Frame
200
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Replacing Dual Processor Modules
Figure 6-17 shows the processor cable placed incorrectly and is pinched between the heatsink and
the extender board frame.
Figure 6-17 Processor Cable Placed Incorrectly
Heatsink
Cable Placed Incorrectly
Protective plastic sleeve
Sheet metal frame
Step 7. Using the CPU Install Tool 2.5-mm Allen wrench, lock the assembly to the socket by rotating the
cam on the socket 180 degrees clockwise.
TIP
When rotating the locking cam, hold the palm of your hand on top of the assembly
and exert light pressure. This ensures that the assembly stays flush and level to the
socket while it is being tightened.
Step 8. Plug the processor cable into its socket on the extender board.
Step 9. Place the sequencer frame over the processor.
Step 10. Using your fingers, hand-tighten the two knurled thumbscrews on the sequencer frame just until
the screw stops turning.
NOTE
Do not tighten the other four shoulder screws until you have first hand-tightened the
two knurled thumbscrews.
Step 11. Using a CPU Install Tool (Torx T15 driver), tighten the four remaining T15 shoulder screws until
they just bottom out. Follow the tightening sequence shown in Figure 6-18, “Installing Dual
IMPORTANT Do not overtighten the four shoulder screws. They can shear off if overtightened.
Stop tightening the shoulder screws when you feel them just bottom out.
Step 12. Using the Torx T15 driver, finish tightening the two thumbscrews.
IMPORTANT Do not overtighten the two thumbscrews. They can shear off if overtightened.
Tightening the thumbscrews 1/4 turn tightens them sufficiently.
201
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Replacing Dual Processor Modules
Figure 6-18 Installing Dual Processor Module on Processor Extender Board
Tightening sequence for 4-shoulder screws is 1, 2, 3, 4.
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN (see step 7).
3
2 Knurled
Thumb-
1
Torx-T15: Use to
Tighten Shoulder
Screws and
2
Screws
4
Thumbscrews
2.5-mm Allen
Key
Power Cable (Protected by
Plastic Sleeve)
Align Pins on
Heatsink with
Slots in
Frame
Slots*
Slots*
*Slots shown are at
CPU1 socket.
Processor shown is
being mounted on
CPU0 socket per CPU
load order.
Step 13. Replace the processor extender board in the server. (See “Replacing the Processor Extender Board”
202
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Unit
Step 16. Verify processor replacement and operation by using the system utilities.)
•
•
•
Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation.
Use the BCH commands to verify operation.
Use MAKODIAG provided by the ODE to exercise the processor.
Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Unit
There are three hot-swappable chassis fan units in the server. Fan units 0, 1, and 2 are in the center of the
chassis spanning the full chassis width. Fan units 0 and 1 are interchangeable and are in the left and center
positions. Fan unit 2 is smaller and only fits into the right-most position behind the power supply. The
hot-swappable fans can be replaced using the procedures in this section when power is on or off.
CAUTION
NOTE
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
A hot-swappable device does not require interaction with the operating system before the
device is removed from or installed into the server.
The ac power to the server does not need to be off to remove or replace a hot-swappable chassis
fan unit.
Removing a Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Unit
To remove a hot-swappable chassis fan unit, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
203
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Unit
Step 3. Grasp the fan unit locking handle, tilt it up, and pull out the fan from the chassis.
Figure 6-19 Hot-Swappable I/O Chassis Fans Removal and Replacement
IMPORTANT When one fan unit is removed from the server, the remaining fan units operate at full
speed. Operation will continue until an overtemperature condition is detected. If an
overtemperature condition occurs, the server shuts down.
Step 4. Repeat the same process for removal and replacement of the hot-swappable power supply chassis
fan.
204
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly
Replacing a Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan Unit
To replace a hot-swappable chassis fan unit, follow these steps:
Step 1. Orient the fan unit by aligning the appropriate icon on the fan unit handle to the identical icon on
the chassis wall. Fan units 0 and 1 have “circle” icons and fan unit 2 has a “square” icon.
Step 2. Push the fan unit firmly into the housing and close the handle until flush to the top of the chassis.
The fan unit plugs into the power outlet on the I/O baseboard.
CAUTION
If the fan unit handle does not close completely it is misaligned. Remove the fan unit
and check that the alignment icons are oriented correctly.
Step 3. Check the QuickFind diagnostic panel LED indicating the replaced fan unit.
•
•
When the fan functions normally, the LED is off
When the fan fails, the LED is lit
I/O Baseboard Assembly
System information is stored on the I/O baseboard assembly. If you are installing a new I/O baseboard
assembly, you must write the serial number and model string information to the I/O baseboard after
installation.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing the I/O baseboard assembly.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
206
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly
Removing the I/O Baseboard Assembly
NOTE
PA 8900 CPUs require PDC greater than 44.21, which is loaded on A6961-67401 and
A6961-69401 repair parts. A6961-67301 and A6961-69301 repair parts enables the system to
boot to BCH where PDC must be updated to greater than 44.21.
To remove the I/O baseboard assembly, follow these steps:
Step 1. Save (record) the boot configuration settings. The settings can be found using the INFO ALLBCH
command . You may need to reset the iLO MP and boot configuration settings after replacing the
I/O baseboard assembly.
Step 2. Save iLO MP configuration settings. You can find the setting for the iLO MP LAN console access by
using the iLO MP LSand DNScommands. If you purchased the iLO MP Advanced Licence pack,
save the license key using the iLO MP LMcommand.
Step 3. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
page 203.)
Step 6. Unplug all external cabling attached to the ports at the rear of the chassis.
Step 7. Unplug the SCSI cables attached to the HBA board in PCI slot 1.
CAUTION
When unplugging the SCSI cables, note the labeling on the SCSI A and SCSI B
channel cables. When plugging-in these cables, you must match each cable with its
appropriate socket on the SCSI HBA. If the cables are mismatched your system may
not reboot. Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel.
207
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly
Step 8. Lift up on the locking lever attached to the side of the power supply cage to unplug the I/O
baseboard from the socket on the midplane riser board.
Figure 6-21 I/O Baseboard Locking Lever
OPEN
CLOSE
Step 9. Slide the I/O baseboard assembly all the way to the rear until free from chassis. To replace the I/O
baseboard with a new assembly, remove the cover from the VGA port at the rear of the I/O board
and save it to put onto the VGA port of the new baseboard. This VGA graphics port is not supported
in the HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 servers.
208
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly
NOTE
The I/O baseboard assembly is large. Be careful when lifting it out of the server
chassis.
Figure 6-22 I/O Baseboard Removal
Replacing the I/O Baseboard Assembly
To replace the I/O baseboard assembly, follow these steps:
209
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly
Step 1. Before installing the replacement I/O baseboard, check the dipswitch S5102 located on top of the
I/O baseboard. Dipswitch bit 1 must be in the OFF position to disable the onboard Radeon graphics
chip. If you do not disable the Radeon graphics chip, it appears as “unknown-unclaimed” in the
ioscanoutput.
Figure 6-23 S5102 Dipswitch Setting
S5102 (Switch #1) VGA Dipswitch
Off
NOTE
The I/O baseboard is large. Use care when sliding it into the server chassis.
210
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly
Step 2. To disable the on-board Radeon graphics chip, set the S5102, #1 VGA dipswitch to the OFF
position.
Figure 6-24 Accessing the S5102 Dipswitch
rp44x0 With Top Cover and Center Fan (Fan #1) Removed to
Allow Access to I/O Baseboard VGA/CPU Dipswitches
Step 3. Ensure that all fan modules are removed from the chassis before sliding in the I/O baseboard or
both the fans and the I/O baseboard can be damaged.
Step 4. Align the I/O baseboard assembly rails with the chassis slots and slide the assembly into the
chassis until it stops against the midplane riser board socket.
CAUTION
Ensure the I/O baseboard locking lever is in the up position to engage correctly with
the midplane riser board socket.
Step 5. With the I/O board flush against the midplane riser board socket, push down firmly on the locking
lever until the I/O baseboard plugs all the way into the midplane riser board socket and the locking
lever clicks into place on the chassis wall (Figure 6-21).
Step 7. Plug all external cables into the ports at the rear of the chassis.
CAUTION
When plugging the SCSI cables, note the labeling on the SCSI A and SCSI B channel
cables. You must match each cable with its appropriate socket on the SCSI HBA. If
the cables are mismatched, your system may not reboot. Both cables and sockets are
clearly marked with the correct channel.
211
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
I/O Baseboard Assembly
Step 8. Plug the internal SCSI cables into the HBA board in PCI slot 1.
Step 10. Reconnect all power and external cables and turn on the system.
Step 11. If you have installed a new I/O baseboard assembly, you must write the serial number and model
string data to the new I/O board. To write the data to the new board, follow these steps:
a. Locate the system serial number and note it for use in the following steps. The system serial
number can be found in the following two places:
•
At the right of the front bezel, above and immediately to the right of the disk drives, locate
the pull tab and extend the tab from the server to display product information. A label
containing the system serial number is attached to the pull tab.
•
A label containing the system serial number is located on the right side of the chassis as you
face the server.
b. Monitor system startup on a terminal. At the BCH prompt, enter the SERcommand to display
the service menu.)
c. To access server information, enter the SER_INITcommand.
•
•
Use the SERNcommand to enter the original product and serial number.
For PRODUCT NUMBER, enter the appropriate number (typically A9956A, A9951A, and
so on).
•
•
For SYSTEM SERIAL NUMBER, enter the serial number from the pull tab or from the side
of the chassis.
For MODEL STRING, enter the model string value applicable to your system. Valid choices
are as follows:
•
•
•
•
9000/800rp4440 PA8800 dc
9000/800rp4440 PA8900 dc
9000/800rp4410 PA8900 dc- Max 4 Core
9000/800rp4410#1 PA8900 dc- 1 Core
When prompted for approval, enter y.
d. To reset the system, enter the resetcommand.
e. Reset the server time and date, and restore the iLO MP configuration settings as described in
the following step.
Step 12. If you have installed a new battery on the I/O baseboard assembly or installed a new I/O baseboard
assembly, you might need to set the server time and date and restore the iLO MP configuration
settings. To set the time and date and restore the iLO MP configuration settings, follow these steps:
a. Using the system console, set the system time and date using the BCH DATEcommand.
b. Using the system console, configure the iLO MP. Incorporate settings saved before removing the
I/O baseboard assembly or set up the iLO MP as needed. For additional information about using
the iLO MP, see the HP Integrity and HP 9000 Integrated Lights-Out Management Processor
Operations Guide.
212
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
System Battery
Step 13. Verify the system board replacement and operation by using the system utilities. If you have set the
time and date and configured the iLO MP, the I/O baseboard assembly is installed and operating
correctly. If you have not yet set the time and date or configured the iLO MP:
•
•
Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation.
Use the BCH commands to verify operation.
Removing and Replacing the I/O Baseboard Locking Lever
The I/O baseboard locking lever is comprised of the plastic lever, a label on the lever, and a metal spring
inside the lever.
To remove the I/O baseboard locking lever, follow these steps:
Step 2. Use a T15 torx screwdriver to remove all three screws from the metal plate on the locking lever.
Step 3. Lift the metal plate off the plastic locking lever (make note of how the plate is positioned on the
lever).
Step 4. Keep the metal cover and the screws together. You will use them to install the replacement lever.
To replace the I/O baseboard locking lever, follow these steps:
Step 1. Place the metal plate on the locking lever using the position of the screw holes on the locking lever
to align with the holes on the metal plate. Make sure to position the metal plate on the lever so the
part of the lever with spring fits between the grove on the metal plate.
Step 2. Line the screw hole on the metal plate that is closest to the grove with the mounting hole on the
plastic lever.
Step 3. Mount the lever on the standoff making sure to align the holes.
Step 4. Insert and tighten the three screws.
Step 5. Replace the I/O baseboard assembly. (See “Replacing the I/O Baseboard Assembly” on page 209.)
System Battery
This section provides information and procedures for replacing the system battery.
Battery Notice
This product contains a Lithium battery.
WARNING
Chapter 6
Lithium batteries can explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, or
dispose of lithium batteries in a fire. Failure to observe this warning can result in
personal injury or damage to equipment.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
System Battery
Replace the battery with only the identical or equivalent battery. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Replacing the System Battery
CAUTION
Before removing the system battery, record all boot and LAN configuration settings listed by
the BCH INFO ALLcommand. These values need to be reset after replacing the battery.
To remove and replace the system battery, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 3. Remove the I/O baseboard assembly from the chassis. (See “Removing the I/O Baseboard Assembly”
214
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
System Battery
Step 4. Locate the system battery on the I/O baseboard.
Figure 6-25 Battery Location on I/O Baseboard
Battery
Step 5. Lift up on the battery holder retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and slide the new battery
out of its socket.
Step 6. Install the new battery by lifting up on the battery holder retaining clip with a flat-head
screwdriver and sliding the battery into its socket.
NOTE
The positive terminal of the battery is designated by the plus (+) sign. The battery is
installed with the plus (+) sign facing up.
Step 7. Replace the I/O baseboard assembly. (See “Replacing the I/O Baseboard Assembly” on page 209.)
215
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Step 9. Reset the server time and date, and restore the iLO MP configuration settings. Proceed as follows:
a. Using the system console, set the system time and date using the BCH DATEcommand.
b. Using the system console, configure the iLO MP. Incorporate settings saved before removing the
I/O baseboard assembly or set up the iLO MP as needed. (For additional information about
using the iLO MP, see the HP Integrity and HP 9000 Integrated Lights-Out Management
Processor Operations Guide.)
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers can contain up to eight PCI/PCI-X cards. PCI/PCI-X cards are located on
the I/O baseboard assembly, under the top cover. Two of these cards are dedicated to I/O functions and require
that the server be powered off for card replacement. The remaining six PCI/PCI-X cards can be hot-plugged
(replaced while power is on and the system is operating). This section describes hot-pluggable operations and
PCI/PCI-X card replacement and addresses the following topics:
•
•
•
PCI/PCI-X Configurations
Describes PCI/PCI-X capabilities and relates card functions and capabilities to specific slots.
Online Addition (OLA)
Installing new PCI/PCI-X expansion cards in empty slots without powering off the server.
Online Replacement (OLR)
Replacing a PCI/PCI-X card without powering off the server. This action requires suspending the
associated driver. The existing driver for the old card must be compatible with the new card.
CAUTION
A special OLR requirement for HP-UX 11i v1 (and higher) is that the card to be replaced
must be exactly the same as the removed card. This is also called like-for-like replacement.
•
PCI/PCI-X Slot Location (Locate)
To easily locate the PCI/PCI-X slot at which to perform a hot-pluggable operation, you can command the
attention LEDs on the OLX divider and the I/O baseboard to blink and act as visual cues to the active slot
location. This operation is always initiated through a software or web interface, and is optional to the
operating system on the server.
216
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
PCI/PCI-X Configurations
PCI/PCI-X slots are numbered from 1 through 8 in the server.
Figure 6-26
Slot ID Numbering
PCI-X Bus 1
PCI-X Bus 2
PCI-X Bus 3
PCI-X Bus 4
PCI-X Bus 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PCI Slot ID Numbers
Amber Attention LEDs
Green Power LEDs
Amber Attention LEDs
Public I/O
Hot-Pluggable PCI-X
Core I/O
PCI-X
The following describes configuration requirements for slots 1 through 8:
•
PCI-X slots 1 and 2 are dedicated for use by the core I/O cards: SCSI HBA card in slot 1 and Gigabit
Ethernet LAN card in slot 2. Slots 1 and 2 are not hot-pluggable. Additional PCI/PCI-X expansion
cards cannot be placed in slots 1 or 2.
•
Slots 3 and 4 share a PCI-X bus, and slots 5 and 6 share a PCI-X bus. The maximum capability of each of
the shared slots is PCI/PCI-X 66 MHz. If a PCI/PCI-X 133 MHz card is placed in a shared slot, the
PCI/PCI-X 133 MHz card will runs at a maximum of 66 MHz. If different modes (PCI versus PCI-X) or
slower speeds (33 MHz) are used, then the slot automatically downgrades to accept the change.
217
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Shared slots have card compatibility restrictions. If one of the shared slots is occupied then the card being
added to the second slot is limited by the configuration of the occupied slot. If the new card has a slower
capability than the current bus configuration, it cannot work. If the new card has a faster capability than
the current bus configuration, it will only run at the bus mode and frequency of the current bus
configuration.
•
Slots 7 and 8 are single slots. The maximum capability of each slot is PCI-X 133 MHz. Only slots 7 and 8
enable 133 MHz, PCI-X cards to run at full speed. These two slots are not limited by bus-mode or
frequency-related incompatibilities.
Table 6-4 lists the PCI/PCI-X cards vs. slot frequency/bus mode compatibility for shared slots.
Table 6-4
PCI/PCI-X Card vs. Slot Frequency/Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared
Slots
a
Current PCI Bus
Mode and
Cards to be installed
Frequency for the
Current Card in a
Shared Slot
PCI 33 MHz
PCI 66 MHz
PCI-X 66 MHz
PCI-X 133 MHz
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
PCI 33 MHz
PCI 66 MHz
PCI-X 66 MHz
New card running
at 33 MHz
New card running
at 33 MHz
New card running
at 33 MHz
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Incompatible-
frequencyc
New card running
at 66 MHz
New card running
at 66 MHz
Incompatible-busd
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Incompatible-
frequencyc
New card running
at 66 MHz
New card running
at 66 MHz
PCI-X 133 MHze
Compatibleb
Compatibleb
Incompatible-
frequencyc
Incompatible-
frequencyc
Running at PCI-X
66 MHz)
New card running
at 66 MHz
New card running
at 66 MHz
a. The conditions described in this table apply only to shared slots (slots 3 and 4 on bus number 2 and
slots 5 and 6 on bus number 3). Slots 7 and 8 are not shared slots.
b. Compatible: card is accepted and runs at the frequency shown.
c. Incompatible frequency: card does not work.
d. Incompatible-bus: Card does not work. The new card does not initialize and powers off.
e. Maximum bus mode and frequency supported on shared slots is PCI-X 66 MHz.
PCI/PCI-X Card Path Logging
Some PCI/PCI-X failures result in I/O path logging. These paths help to indicate the source of the error and
may be included in the error message or logged into console or event logs.
218
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Table 6-5 PCI I/O Paths
Function
Associated
with Path
Slot
Location
ACPI Path
Slot 1 (core I/O SCSI) Ultra 160/320 dual-channel
SCSI or RAID HBA
Leftmost slot (nearest to
center of baseboard)
0/1/1/0 Channel A
0/1/1/1 Channel B
Slot 2 (core I/O LAN) Single or Dual-port Gigabit LAN 2nd from left
0/1/2
0/4/1
Slot 3
I/O with 66 MHz 64-bit PCI-X
card (shared with slot 4)
3rd from left
4th from left
5th from left
6th from left
7th from left
Slot 4
I/O with 66 MHz 64-bit PCI-X
card (shared with slot 3)
0/4/2
0/5/1
0/5/2
0/2/1
0/6/1
Slot 5
I/O with 66 MHz 64-bit PCI-X
card (shared with slot 6)
Slot 6
I/O with 66 MHz 64-bit PCI-X
card (shared with slot 5)
Slot 7
I/O with 133 MHz 64-bit PCI-X
card
Slot 8 (right)
I/O with 133 MHz 64-bit PCI-X
card
Right-most slot (nearest
to edge of baseboard)
Table 6-6
PCI I/O Hardware Paths
Mapper
Path
HP-UX
Path
PCI Bus
Address
PCI Card Functionality
USB Port 1
USB Port 2
DVD Drive
0/0/2/0
0/0/2/0
0x00-0x1F
0x00-0x1F
0x00-0x1F
0x00-0x1F
0x20-0x3F
0x20-0x3F
0x20-0x3F
0x20-0x3F
0x20-0x3F
0x20-0x3F
0x20-0x3F
0/0/2/1
0/0/2/1
0/0/3/0.0.0
0/0/3/0
0/0/3/0.0.0
0/0/3/0
IDE Controller
Internal SCSI - Slot 1 simplex configuration
Internal SCSI - Slot 1 duplex configuration
Internal SCSI - Slot 2
0/1/1/0.0.0
0/1/1/0.0.0
0/1/1/0.1.0
0/1/1/0
0/1/1/0.0.0
0/1/1/0.0.0
0/1/1/0.1.0
0/1/1/0
PCI Slot 1 - Channel A SCSI
PCI Slot 1 - Channel B SCSI
0/1/1/1
0/1/1/1
PCI Slot 1 - Channel B external SCSI
PCI Slot 2 - GigaBit LAN Port A
0/1/1/1.x.y
0/1/2/0
0/1/1/1.x.y
01/2/0
219
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Table 6-6
PCI I/O Hardware Paths (Continued)
Mapper
Path
HP-UX
Path
PCI Bus
Address
PCI Card Functionality
PCI Slot 2 - GigaBit LAN Port B
PCI Slot 3
0/1/2/1
0/4/1
0/1/2/1
0x20-0x3F
0x80-0x9F
0x80-0x9F
0xA0-0xBF
0xA0-0xBF
0x40-0x7F
0xC0-0xFF
0x00-0x1F
0x00-0x1F
0/4/1
0/4/2
0/5/1
0/5/2
0/2/1
0/6/1
0/0/1/0
0/0/1/1
PCI Slot 4
0/4/2
PCI Slot 5
0/5/1
PCI Slot 6
0/5/2
PCI Slot 7
0/2/1
PCI Slot 8
0/6/1
UPS Communications Controller
Local/Remote Serial Controller
0/0/1/0
0/0/1/1
OLA
Before installing a PCI/PCI-X card, ensure that the proper drivers for that PCI/PCI-X card are installed.
NOTE
If you are installing the Graphics Kit A6150B, use slots 3-8. However, do not install the
included USB card. The server currently supports USB and the ports are already located on the
rear of the server.
If you are installing the RAID card A7143A, you must install it into slot 8. If you install this
card in any other slot, it interferes with the manual retention latch (MRL) on the OLX divider
in the next slot. Because of this interference, you can install only two RAID cards in the system
in slot 1 and slot 8.
To add a PCI/PCI-X card into an empty slot, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 3. Select an empty slot and pull up on the MRL located on the OLX divider approximately 75 degrees.
220
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
CAUTION
Do not pull up on the MRL of a powered on, occupied slot or your system will crash.
Figure 6-27 PCI/PCI-X OLX Divider Layout
PCI-X Card Latch
Closed Position
PCI-X Card Latch
Open Position
MRL—Closed
MRL—Open
Power LED
Light Pipe
Attention Button
Attention LED
Light Pipe
Figure 6-28 PCI-X Card Latch Opening Sequence
1
2
3
4
221
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Step 4. Ensure that the MRL and the card latch on the OLX divider are already open and insert the
PCI/PCI-X card to be added into the empty slot.
CAUTION
When inserting the PCI/PCI-X card, be careful you do not accidentally touch an
attention button on the other OLX dividers—this will initiate an undesired
shutdown of another PCI/PCI-X card/slot. If you do this, push the doorbell again
within five seconds to cancel the shutdown.
222
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
NOTE
Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot, or undesired results can occur after
power is reapplied to the slot.
Figure 6-29 Inserting PCI/PCI-X Card
223
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Step 5. If the PCI/PCI-X card is full size, close the slider gate latch to secure the end of the card.
Figure 6-30 Slider Gate Latch
Step 6. Push the manual retention latch down until it seats against the chassis wall.
224
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Step 7. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch to the closed position to capture the PCI/PCI-X card and manual
retention latch into the closed position.
Step 8. Press the attention button. The power LED starts to blink. Wait until the power LED goes from
blinking to steady on.
NOTE
After pushing the attention button, you have five seconds to cancel the operation by
pushing the attention button again. After five seconds, pressing the attention button
initiates slot power off for OLR of the card.
Step 10. Push the server all the way back into the rack until it stops.
OLR
CAUTION
For HP-UX 11i v1 (and higher), you can only replace an existing card with an identical card.
To remove and replace a PCI/PCI-X card into a populated slot, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 3. Disconnect all external and internal cables attached to the PCI card in the side service bay.
Step 4. Press the attention button located on the OLX divider that controls the affected slot. The power
LED starts to blink. Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady off.
NOTE
After pushing the attention button, you have five seconds to cancel the operation by
pushing the attention button again.
Step 5. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch approximately 45 degrees on the chassis until the MRL is free to
pull up.
Step 6. Pull up on the MRL located on the OLX divider to turn off power to the slot. (Figure 6-27)
Step 7. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch on the chassis approximately 45 degrees clockwise to completely
expose the PCI/PCI-X bulkhead. (Figure 6-28)
Step 8. If the PCI/PCI-X card is full size, open the slider gate latch to release the end of the card. (Figure
6-30)
Step 9. Grasp the top edge of the PCI/PCI-X card and remove it from the slot.
NOTE
There is not an ejection lever to remove PCI/PCI-X cards as there was on previous
server models. You must remove the PCI/PCI-X card manually. Cutouts in the OLX
dividers enable access for grasping the PCI/PCI-X cards.
Step 10. Insert the new PCI/PCI-X card into the powered off slot. (Figure 6-29)
225
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Step 11. If the PCI/PCI-X card is full size, close the slider gate latch to secure the end of the card. (Figure
6-30)
CAUTION
When inserting the PCI/PCI-X card, be careful you do not accidentally touch an
attention button on the other OLX dividers—this will initiate an undesired
shutdown of another PCI/PCI-X card/slot. If you do this, push the doorbell again
within five seconds to cancel the shutdown.
Also, ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot, or undesired results can occur
after power is reapplied to the slot.
NOTE
Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot, or undesired results can occur after
power is reapplied to the slot.
Step 12. Push the MRL down until it seats against the chassis wall.
Step 13. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch on the chassis to the closed position. This locks the PCI/PCI-X card
into its slot and the MRL into the closed position.
Step 14. Press the attention button. The power LED starts to blink.
Step 15. Wait for the power LED to stop blinking; the PCI/PCI-X card is now active.
Step 16. Reconnect all the cables.
Step 18. Push the server all the way back into the rack until it stops.
Removing a PCI/PCI-X Card Offline
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing a PCI card from the server.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Record the slot location of all PCI cards as they are removed. Depending on the operating
system, replacing the PCI cards in a different location might require system reconfiguration
and can cause boot failure.
To remove a PCI card from the server with power off, follow these steps:
226
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing PCI/PCI-X Cards
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 3. Disconnect all external and internal cables attached to the PCI card in the side service bay.
Step 4. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch on the chassis to approximately 45 degrees clockwise to free the
MRL. (Figure 6-27)
Step 5. Pull up on the MRL until it stops.
Step 6. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch another 45 degrees clockwise to completely expose the PCI-PCI-X
card bulkhead. (Figure 6-27)
Step 7. If the PCI/PCI-X card is full size, open the slider gate bracket to enable PCI/PCI-X card removal.
(Figure 6-39)
Step 8. Remove the card from the slot by grasping the top edges of the card and pulling up. The notches in
the OLX dividers provide access to the PCI card for removal.
Installing a PCI Card Offline
To replace a PCI card with the server power off, follow these steps:
Step 1. Insert the card into the appropriate slot. (Figure 6-26)
Step 2. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch on the chassis approximately 45 degrees counterclockwise to enable
closing of the MRL. (Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28)
Step 3. Push down on the MRL until it stops against the chassis wall. (Figure 6-27)
Step 4. Turn the PCI/PCI-X card latch on the chassis another 45 degrees counterclockwise to lock the
PCI/PCI-X card into position.
Step 5. If the PCI/PCI-X card is full size, close the slider gate bracket to secure the card. (Figure 6-30)
Step 6. Reconnect all internal and external cables to the PCI/PCI-X card.
Step 8. Slide the server all the way back into the rack until it stops.
Step 9. Turn on power by plugging the ac power cords into power supply units.
227
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
OLX Dividers
OLX Dividers
OLX dividers are located on the I/O baseboard assembly between the PCI cards. Six OLX dividers provide
short circuit protection to the hot-pluggable PCI accessory boards by preventing inadvertent contact between
boards during the replacement or addition of a board.
Additionally, each OLX divider has two light pipes that transfer illumination from one green power LED and
one amber attention LED mounted on the I/O baseboard, to the top of the divider. The light pipes enables you
to view the LED status when the top cover is removed.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing a PCI card divider.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing an OLX Divider
NOTE
An alternative method of removing OLX dividers is to remove all OLX dividers at once by
removing the rack they are mounted in from the I/O baseboard assembly, then removing or
replacing the individual OLX divider, and then replacing the rack back on the I/O baseboard.
The OLX divider rack is attached to the I/O baseboard with four Torx T15 fasteners.
To remove an OLX divider, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
228
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
OLX Dividers
Step 3. Pull up on the manual retention latch to unlock the OLX divider from the chassis wall.
Figure 6-31 OLX Divider Removal and Replacement
Manual Retention
Latch
Locking
Tabs
229
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Step 5. If you are removing the entire OLX divider rack, remove the four T15 screws attaching the rack to
the I/O baseboard assembly.
Step 6. Using your fingers, push the two tabs that attach the OLX divider to the I/O baseboard and pull the
OLX divider up sharply to disengage it from the I/O baseboard.
CAUTION
When extracting the OLX divider, ensure that you release the locking tabs
completely or you can damage them. If you damage the tabs, the OLX divider does
not seat properly when you reinsert it.
Replacing an OLX Divider
To replace an OLX divider, follow these steps:
Step 1. Insert the OLX divider into the available slot on the I/O baseboard and push down firmly to seat it
into the slot.
Step 2. If you are replacing the entire OLX divider rack onto the I/O baseboard, replace the four T15
screws.
Step 3. Slide the latch on the slider gate bracket closed to lock the rear edge of the PCI divider.
Step 4. Push down on the manual retention latch until it locks into the chassis wall.
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
This section explains how to upgrade the SCSI cards to enable U320 operation and how to optionally change
the SCSI configuration (duplex to simplex) in the server. The U320 enablement process involves replacing the
duplex PCA card (duplex configuration only) and the SCSI backplane (simplex and duplex configurations).
You can configure the embedded backplane for internal SCSI hard disks drives in the HP 9000 rp4410 and
rp4440 servers in either simplex or duplex mode.
In simplex mode, both embedded internal hard disks are on SCSI channel A. SCSI channel B can be used for
external devices. Remove the cover from channel B before connecting external devices. Do not connect
external devices to SCSI channel A.
In duplex mode, each hard disk is on a separate SCSI bus. Do not connect external devices to either SCSI
channel A or B.
Time Required
Upgrading the server can require several hours, depending on preparatory time. Plan for an hour of system
downtime. Preparatory time includes checking the upgrade kit, preparing an ESD-safe work station, and
backing up your data.
231
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Upgrade Tasks
Upgrade tasks depend on whether the server is configured for simplex or duplex operation. The following
information provides the high-level steps required to perform the upgrade. The actual upgrade procedures are
provided below.
Simplex Configuration Upgrade
1. Back up your data
2. Shutdown the server (disconnect ac power)
3. Remove server components
4. Replace SCSI backplane
5. Install server components
6. Verify the upgrade installation
Duplex Configuration Upgrade
1. Back up your data
2. Shutdown the server (disconnect ac power)
3. Remove server components
4. Remove the SCSI duplex board
5. Replace SCSI backplane
6. Install the replacement SCSI duplex board
7. Install server components
8. Verify the upgrade installation
Back Up Your System
Before performing the server upgrade, protect yourself by backing up all data and the server OS. In the event
of interruptions (for example, power failure or interference), you may need to resume operation in the old
configuration before upgrading the server.
Back up your data in accordance with local procedures.
Always keep a backup copy of the current OS available for emergency use. The OS was provided on CD with
the server. You can obtain a copy from your HP-Information Resource Center (ITRC).
Removing Server Components
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing server components.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
232
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure, contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
To remove server components for upgrade, follow these steps:
Step 1. Make sure all users are logged off and that the server is not in use.
Step 2. Perform an orderly shutdown of the server operating system.
Step 3. Press the power button on the server front panel. Verify that the power LED goes off.
Step 4. Disconnect the ac power cords from the server rear panel.
Step 9. Remove the processor extender board. (See “Removing the Processor Extender Board” on page 192.)
Removing the SCSI Duplex Board
The SCSI duplex board is only installed if the server is configured for duplex operation. The SCSI duplex
board is secured to the disk drive cage by a bracket and connected to the SCSI backplane.
To remove the SCSI duplex board, follow these steps:
233
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Step 2. Pull the SCSI duplex board forward to disconnect the backplane connector and release it from the
disk drive cage.
Figure 6-34 Remove the SCSI Duplex Board
Removing the SCSI Backplane
You must replace the SCSI backplane for both simplex and duplex configurations. To remove the SCSI
backplane, follow these steps:
Step 1. Unplug the internal SCSI cables from the SCSI backplane.
Step 2. Unplug the SCSI backplane-to-midplane riser cable from the SCSI backplane.
Step 3. If the server is configured for simplex operation, remove the SCSI Jumper Cable (Figure 6-35).
235
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
NOTE
The SCSI jumper cable bridges the two SCSI connectors on the SCSI backplane
when the server is configured for simplex operation. The SCSI jumper cable is not
installed in duplex configurations.
Figure 6-35 Remove the SCSI Backplane Jumper Cable
Step 4. Remove the hot-pluggable disk drives. (See “Removing a Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive” on page 250.)
Step 5. Turn the swivel latch on top of the hot-pluggable hard disk drive cage to unlatch the SCSI
backplane from the hard disk cage.
Step 6. Grasp the top edge of the SCSI backplane and pull up until it releases from the keyway slots on the
back of the hot-pluggable disk drive cage.
236
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Step 7. Push the SCSI backplane away from the disk drive cage and lift it up and out of the chassis.
Figure 6-36 Lift the SCSI Backplane Out of the Chassis
Backplane With Jumper
Cable Attached
Replacing the SCSI Backplane
To replace the SCSI backplane, follow these steps:
Step 1. Replace the SCSI backplane to the rear of the disk drive cage (HP part number A6961-04075).
Step 2. If your system is configured for simplex operation, connect the SCSI jumper cable to the SCSI
backplane connectors.
Step 3. Replug the SCSI backplane-to-midplane cable back into the SCSI backplane.
Step 4. Replug the internal SCSI cable into the SCSI back plane.
If the server is configured for simplex operation, continue the upgrade at “Installing the Server Components”
237
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Installing the SCSI Duplex Board
Install the SCSI duplex board only if your system is configured for duplex operation. To install the duplex
board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Align the bracket tabs with the slots on the side of the disk drive cage.
Figure 6-37 Aligning the Bracket Tabs on the SCSI Duplex Board
Step 2. Press the bracket against the disk drive cage until the bracket locks into place.
Step 3. Align the connector of the duplex board with the connector on the SCSI backplane.
Step 4. Press the board connector into the backplane connector.
Step 5. Plug the SCSI cable B connector into the SCSI connector located on the backplane next to the
238
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Step 6. Connect the other end of SCSI cable B to the SCSI B channel connector on the SCSI adapter board.
Figure 6-38 Connecting SCSI Cable B to the SCSI Adapter Board
Step 7. Close the swivel latch on top of the hot-pluggable disk drive cage.
Step 8. Replace the two hot-pluggable disk drives into the disk drive cage.
Installing the Server Components
To Install the necessary components in the server chassis, follow these steps:
Step 1. Install the processor extender board. See “Replacing the Processor Extender Board” on page 194.
239
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Verify the Upgrade Installation
After completing the upgrade, verify that the sever is ready for operation as follows:
Step 1. Reconnect ac power to rear panel connectors.
Step 2. Press the front panel power button to power on the server.
Step 3. Wait for completion of the POST. Verify that no errors have been detected.
Step 4. At the BCH prompt, enter the in io command. Verify that all installed disk drives are recognized
and operating correctly.
Step 5. Initiate the OS and monitor operation. Check for error messages. Check the System Event Log
(SEL) for erroneous system events
Converting SCSI From Duplex to Simplex Operation
This section explains how to convert your SCSI from duplex to simplex. The procedure requires unplugging
and stowing the SCSI B cable, removing the SCSI duplex board, and installing a jumper cable on the SCSI
backplane.
Safety Information
Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing removal and replacement procedures.
Voltages might be present within the server. Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic
discharge.
Follow the listed guidelines to ensure safe handling of components and to prevent harm to both you and the
server:
•
•
•
Use an antistatic wrist strap and a grounding mat, such as those included in the Electrically Conductive
Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-1155).
Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or
any electrical components on accessory boards.
Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build-up, such as wool or synthetic materials.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been
disconnected from the server before converting your server.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac
power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power
switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
Accessing the SCSI Backplane
Before adding the accessories required to convert the server from duplex to simplex, you must remove outer
components to access the SCSI backplane. To gain access to the SCSI backplane, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
240
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
NOTE
If the server is pedestal mounted, you need not remove the pedestal to perform the
duplex to simplex conversion. Proceed directly to the next step.
Convert to Simplex
To convert to simplex, follow these steps:
Step 1. Unplug the SCSI B cable from the SCSI backplane.
Figure 6-39 Unplugging SCSI Cable B from the SCSI Backplane
241
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Step 2. Unplug SCSI cable B connector from the SCSI adapter board.
Figure 6-40 Unplug SCSI Cable B from the SCSI Adapter Board
Step 3. Secure the SCSI cable B within the chassis.
242
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Step 4. Remove the SCSI duplex board. Pull the SCSI duplex board forward to disconnect the backplane
connector and release it from the disk drive cage.
Figure 6-41 Removing the Duplex Board
243
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
U320 SCSI Enablement and Conversion Procedures
Step 5. Connect the SCSI jumper cable to the SCSI backplane connectors.
Figure 6-42 Installing the SCSI Jumper Cable
Installing Server Components
To install the necessary components in the server chassis, follow these steps:
Step 1. Install the processor extender board. (See “Replacing the Memory Extender Board” on page 186.)
Step 2. Install the memory extender board. (See “Replacing the Processor Extender Board” on page 194.)
Verification of Upgrade Installation
After completing the upgrade, verify that the sever is ready for operation as follows:
Step 1. Reconnect ac power to the rear panel connectors.
Step 2. Press the front panel power button to power on the server.
244
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing Core I/O Cards
Step 3. Wait for completion of the POST. Verify that no errors have been detected.
Step 4. At the BCH prompt, enter the in iocommand. Verify that all installed disk drives are recognized
and operating correctly.
Step 5. Initiate the OS and monitor operation. Check for error messages. Check the SEL for erroneous
system events
Removing and Replacing Core I/O Cards
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers have two I/O card slots that are dedicated for core I/O cards.
Safety Information
Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing removal and replacement procedures.
Voltages might be present within the server. Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic
discharge.
Follow the procedures listed below to ensure safe handling of components and to prevent harm to both you
and the server:
•
•
•
Use an antistatic wrist strap and a grounding mat, such as those included in the Electrically Conductive
Field Service Grounding Kit (HP part number 9300-1155).
Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or
any electrical components on accessory boards.
Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build-up, such as wool or synthetic materials.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been
disconnected from the server before removing and replacing the core I/O cards.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac
power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power
switch is in the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
Required Service Tools
Service of this product can require one or more of the following tools:
•
•
•
Electrically Conductive Field Service Kit (HP part number 9300-1155)
1/4 inch Flat Blade Screwdriver
ACX-15 torx Screwdriver
245
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing Core I/O Cards
PCI Slot Locations and Configurations
PCI slots are numbered from 1 through 8 in the server. The dedicated core I/O card slots are slots 1 and 2.
The following describes configuration requirements for slots 1 and 2:
•
PCI slot 1 is dedicated for use by a SCSI HBA card. Slot 1 is not hot-pluggable. Additional PCI expansion
cards cannot be placed in slot 1.
•
PCI slot 2 is dedicated for use by a LAN card. Slot 2 is not hot-pluggable. Additional PCI expansion cards
cannot be placed in slot 2.
Removing the LAN Core I/O Card
To remove the LAN core I/O card in slot 2, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 3. Disconnect any LAN cables connected to the LAN core I/O card.
IMPORTANT Before disconnecting cables, note the cable configuration. Cables must be attached to
the correct connectors to ensure proper functionality.
Step 4. Open the blue PCI card latch for slot 2 by twisting it clockwise.
Figure 6-43 LAN I/O Card Latch Location
LAN PCI I/O Card Latch
for Slot 2 (Closed)
LAN PCI Card
246
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing Core I/O Cards
Installing the LAN Core I/O Card
To install the LAN core I/O card, follow these steps:
Step 1. Insert the replacement LAN core I/O card into slot 2.
CAUTION
Always handle I/O cards by their edges. Failure to comply with this precaution can
result in damage to the card.
Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card can be damaged when
power is reapplied to the slot.
Figure 6-44 Installing the LAN I/O Card
Step 2. Close the blue PCI card latch for slot 2 by twisting it counterclockwise.
Step 3. Reconnect the LAN cables to the LAN core I/O card. Be sure to attach cables to their original
connectors.
Step 5. Push the server back into the rack until it stops.
Removing the SCSI Core I/O Card
To remove the SCSI core I/O card in slot 1, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
247
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing Core I/O Cards
Step 3. Disconnect any internal and external SCSI cables connected to the SCSI core I/O card.
Step 4. Open the blue PCI card latch for slot 1 by twisting it clockwise.
Figure 6-45 SCSI I/O Card latch Location
SCSI PCI I/O Card Latch
For slot 1 (Closed)
SCSI Cables
SCSI Card
Step 5. Remove the internal and external SCSI cables from the SCSI core I/O card.
Step 6. Remove THE SCSI core I/O card.
Installing the SCSI Core I/O Card
To install the SCSI core I/O card, follow these steps:
Step 1. Insert the replacement SCSI core I/O card into slot 1.
248
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Removing and Replacing Core I/O Cards
CAUTION
Always handle I/O cards by their edges. Failure to comply with this precaution can
result in damage to the card.
Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card can be damaged when
power is reapplied to the slot.
Figure 6-46 Install SCSI I/O Card
Step 2. Close the blue PCI card latch for slot 1 by twisting it counterclockwise.
Step 3. Reconnect the internal and external SCSI cables to the SCSI core I/O card.
Step 5. Push the server back into the rack until it stops.
249
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drives
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drives
The two hot-pluggable disk drives are located in the front of the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers. The
hot-pluggable disk drives are replaced using the procedures in this section when power is on or off.
CAUTION
A hot-pluggable device can require interaction with the operating system before the device can
be safely removed from or installed into the server. Verify that the operating system supports
removing and replacing disk drives while the operating system is running. If the operating
system does not support this feature, shut down the operating system before attempting this
procedure. Failure to observe this caution results in system failure.
NOTE
The replacement disk drive must be the same product ID as the disk drive that is being
replaced.
HP often uses different manufacturers for disks that have the same product number. The
replacement disk drive will have the same capacity and block size as the defective disk if they
have the same product number.
Removing a Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive
NOTE
For cooling purposes, always leave the volume filler in slot 2 if you do not use a second disk
drive.
To remove a hot-pluggable disk drive, follow these steps:
Step 1. Grasp the tab of the latch on the selected disk drive.
Step 2. Push the tab toward the latch and pull the latch out; the disk unlocks.
Step 3. Pull gently until the disk drive slides out of the chassis.
Replacing a Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive
One additional hot-pluggable disk drive can be added to the server in slot 2. Always use low profile disk drives
(1 in high) in the HP 9000 rp4410 and p4440 servers.
250
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Pluggable Disk Drives
Figure 6-47 shows the disk drive slots.
Figure 6-47
Disk Drive Installation in Slots 1 and 2
Slot 2—SCSI ID 1
Slot 1—SCSI ID 0
To install a hot-pluggable disk drive, follow these steps:
Step 1. Slide the hot-pluggable disk drive into slot 2 until it is seated.
Figure 6-48 Disk Drive Installation in Slot 2
Step 2. Close the drive-ejector handle by pushing it down until it clicks.
251
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
SCSI Backplane
If you will not be installing a hot-pluggable disk drive in slot 2, you must install a volume filler.
Figure 6-49
Volume Filler Installation in Slot 2
SCSI Backplane
The SCSI backplane is attached to the rear of the disk media housing at the front right side of the chassis.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing the SCSI backplane.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
252
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
SCSI Backplane
Removing the SCSI Backplane
To remove the SCSI backplane, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. (See “Removing the Processor Extender Board” on page 192.)
Step 7. Unplug the internal SCSI cables from the SCSI backplane.
Step 8. Unplug the SCSI backplane-to-midplane riser cable from the SCSI backplane.
Step 9. Remove the hot-pluggable disk drives. (See “Removing a Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive” on page 250.)
Step 10. Turn the swivel latch on top of the hot-pluggable hard disk drive cage to unlatch the SCSI
backplane from the cage.
Step 11. Grasp the top edge of the SCSI backplane and pull up until it releases from the keyway slots on the
back of the hot-pluggable disk drive cage.
Step 12. Push the SCSI backplane away from the disk drive cage and lift it up and out of the chassis.
253
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
SCSI Backplane
Figure 6-50
SCSI Backplane Removal and Replacement
Replacing the SCSI Backplane
To replace the SCSI backplane, follow these steps:
Step 1. Replace the SCSI backplane to the rear of the disk drive cage.
Step 2. Turn the swivel latch on top of the hot-pluggable hard disk drive cage to latch the SCSI backplane
to the cage.
Step 3. Replace the two hot-pluggable disk drives into the disk drive cage. (See “Hot-Pluggable Disk
Step 4. Replug the SCSI backplane-to-midplane cable back into the SCSI backplane.
Step 5. Replug the internal SCSI cables into the SCSI back plane.
Step 6. Replace the processor extender board. (See “Replacing the Processor Extender Board” on page 194.)
254
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Midplane Riser Board
Midplane Riser Board
The midplane riser board is attached to the main bulkhead in the center of the chassis.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing the midplane riser backplane.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing the Midplane Riser Board
To remove the midplane riser board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. (See “Removing the Processor Extender Board” on page 192.)
Step 10. Unplug the power distribution board power cable and signal cable from the midplane riser board.
255
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Midplane Riser Board
Step 11. Remove the air baffle.
Step 12. Release the latches on the DVD I/O board cover and front panel display board cable to disconnect
the cable from the midplane riser board.
Step 13. Unplug the QuickFind diagnostic board cable from the midplane riser board.
NOTE
At this point, all cables and connectors must be unplugged from the midplane riser
board.
Step 14. Using a Torx 15 driver, remove the five T-15 screws attaching the midplane riser board to the
chassis.
Step 15. Grasp the top edge of the midplane riser board and lift straight up to release it from the keyway
slots on the chassis.
256
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Midplane Riser Board
Step 16. Pull straight out and up to remove the midplane riser board from the chassis.
Figure 6-51 Midplane Riser Board
3
5
1-5
Attaching
Screw
2
Locations
1
Midplane Riser
Board
4
257
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swappable Power Supplies
Replacing the Midplane Riser Board
To replace the midplane riser board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Replace the midplane riser board onto the keyway slots on the chassis wall. Then push straight
down until it seats onto the locking studs.
Step 2. Using a Torx 15 driver, replace and tighten the five T-15 screws attaching the midplane riser board
to the chassis.
Step 3. Plug the DVD relay board and front panel display board cable into the midplane riser board.
Step 4. Replace the air baffle.
Step 5. Plug the power distribution board power cable and signal cable into the midplane riser board.
Step 6. Plug the QuickFind diagnostic board cable into the midplane riser board.
Step 8. Replace the duplex board on the SCSI backplane.
Step 9. Replace the I/O baseboard assembly. (See “Replacing the I/O Baseboard Assembly” on page 209.)
Step 11. Replace the processor extender board. (See “Replacing the Processor Extender Board” on page 194.)
Step 12. Replace the memory extender board. (See “Replacing the Memory Extender Board” on page 186.)
Hot-Swappable Power Supplies
The HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers include one or two hot-swappable power supplies. These power
supplies are located at the rear of the server. The supported configuration of the server requires a minimum of
one power supply be installed. A hot-swappable power supply can be replaced using the procedures in this
section when power is on or off.
CAUTION
NOTE
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
A hot-swappable device does not require interaction with the operating system before the
device is removed from or installed into the server.
The ac power to the server does not need to be powered off to remove or replace a
hot-swappable power supply.
258
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swappable Power Supplies
Power Supply Load Order
The supported configuration of the HP 9000 rp4410 or rp4440 server requires a minimum of one power
supply. A second, optional hot-swappable power supply, can be installed to provide N+1 capability.
The left side (viewing from the rear) hot-swappable power supply is identified as P0, the second
hot-swappable power supply is identified as P1. Each hot-swappable power supply requires a separate power
cord be installed in the appropriate power cord receptacle and attached to a power cord support bracket.
WARNING
CAUTION
Be careful when installing a hot-swappable power supply. It is heavier than it
appears.
The empty hot-swappable power supply slot P1 must remain closed with the supplied metal
cover in place when a second power supply is not used. The server can be damaged due to
overheating if the cover does not remain in place.
CAUTION
If the system is powered off, install the hot-swappable power supply into the server before
attaching the new power cord at the rear of the system. Failure to observe this caution results
in damage to the server.
Removing a Hot-Swappable Power Supply
WARNING
Be careful when removing the hot-swappable power supply. It is heavier than it
appears.
To remove a hot-swappable power supply, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out of the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 2. Remove the cable management arm from the rackslide nearest the power supplies. The cable
management arm does not need to be completely removed but moved just enough to enable access
to the power supplies.
Step 3. Remove the power cord plug from the power receptacle.
Step 4. Loosen the captive thumbscrew located at the top left of the power supply.
259
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Hot-Swappable Power Supplies
Step 5. Grasp the handle and pull the power supply out of the server.
Figure 6-52 Hot-Swappable Power Supply Removal and Replacement
Replacing a Hot-Swappable Power Supply
Step 1. Supporting the power supply with both hands, slide it into the empty slot until it plugs into the
socket on the internal power distribution board. Hand-tighten the thumbscrew.
Step 2. Install the power cord into the power supply socket.
Step 3. Apply power to the new power supply. The LED immediately turns on.
260
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Power Distribution Board
Power Distribution Board
The power distribution board is attached to the rear power supply cage, underneath the hot-swappable power
supply fan unit.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing the power distribution board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing the Power Distribution Board
To remove the power distribution board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 3. Remove the power supply fan unit from the chassis. (See “Removing a Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan
Step 5. Unplug the power cable and the signal cable from the midplane riser board.
Step 6. Unplug the QuickFind diagnostic board cable.
Step 7. Using a Torx 15 driver, loosen the one T-15 screw attaching the power distribution board to the
chassis. (Figure 6-53)
Step 8. Push the power distribution board towards the center of the chassis to release it from the keyway
slots. Pull it off the keyway slots and up and out of the chassis.
261
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Power Distribution Board
Figure 6-53
Power Distribution Board Removal and Replacement
Power Distribution Board
Attaching
Screw Hole
Replacing the Power Distribution Board
To replace the power distribution board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Replace the power distribution board over the keyway slots and push it towards the side of the
chassis to lock it onto the studs.
Step 2. Reattach the power distribution board to the chassis bulkhead by replacing the one T-15 screw and
hand tightening it.
Step 3. Replug the power and signal cables into the midplane riser board.
Step 4. Replace the hot-swappable power supplies into the chassis. (See “Replacing a Hot-Swappable Power
Step 5. Replace the power supply fan unit into the chassis. (See “Replacing a Hot-Swappable Chassis Fan
262
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD Drive
DVD Drive
The DVD drive is located on the front of the server.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing a DVD drive.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing a DVD Drive
To remove a DVD drive, follow these steps:
Step 2. Grasp the front of the DVD drive and squeeze the locking tab to release the drive.
Step 3. Pull the drive straight out to remove it from the chassis.
263
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD Drive
Figure 6-54
DVD Drive Removal and Replacement
Replacing a DVD Drive
To replace a DVD drive, follow these steps:
Step 1. Grasp the front of the DVD drive and squeeze the locking tab.
Step 2. Push the drive straight into the drive bay until the locking tab clicks into place.
264
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD I/O Board
DVD I/O Board
The DVD I/O board is located under a metal cover that is directly above the DVD drive at the front left of the
chassis.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing a DVD I/O board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure, contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing a DVD I/O Board
To remove a DVD I/O board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. (See “Removing the Processor Extender Board” on page 192.)
Step 6. Using a Torx 15 driver, remove the two T-15 screws holding the DVD I/O board cover plate to the
chassis and remove the cover plate.
Step 7. Unfasten the release clip attaching the DVD I/O board to the chassis.
Step 8. Lift out the DVD I/O board and remove the midplane riser board connector cable. Remove the DVD
I/O board from the chassis.
265
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
DVD I/O Board
Figure 6-55
DVD I/O Board Removal and Replacement
Cover
DVD I/O
Board
Replacing a DVD I/O Board
To replace a DVD I/O board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Replace the DVD I/O board into the chassis and plug in the midplane riser board connector cable.
Step 2. Refasten the release clip.
Step 3. Replace the cover plate using the two T-15 screws and a Torx 15 driver.
Step 4. Replace the processor extender board. (See “Replacing the Processor Extender Board” on page 194.)
266
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
Display Board
Display Board
The display board is located behind the control panel under the front cover. The display board contains the
server power button and three LEDs that indicate server status.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing the display board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure, contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing the Display Board
To remove the display board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 5. Remove the processor extender board. (See “Removing the Processor Extender Board” on page 192.)
Step 6. Slightly pull out the retaining tab on the chassis that holds the display board in position.
Step 7. Gently unplug the midplane riser board connector cable from the display board and remove the
board from the chassis as shown in Figure 6-56.
267
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
QuickFind Diagnostic Board
Replacing the Display Board
To replace the display board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Gently plug the midplane riser board cable into the display board.
Step 2. Hold the display board in position near the chassis and rotate it into the retaining clip until it clicks
into place.
QuickFind Diagnostic Board
The QuickFind diagnostic board is located on top of the power supply cage, underneath the top cover.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected
from the server before removing or replacing the QuickFind diagnostic board.
Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power
source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in
the off position.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure results in erratic system behavior or
system failure. For assistance with this procedure, contact your local HP Authorized Service
Provider.
Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD
safety precautions can result in damage to the server.
Removing the QuickFind Diagnostic Board
To remove the QuickFind diagnostic board, follow these steps:
Step 1. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See “Accessing a Rack-Mounted
Step 3. Gently squeeze the cover surrounding the QuickFind diagnostic board and remove the cover and
269
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing and Replacing Components
QuickFind Diagnostic Board
Figure 6-57
QuickFind Diagnostic Board Removal and Replacement
Cover
QuickFind
Diagnostic Board
Step 4. Turn this assembly upside down and remove the QuickFind diagnostic board from the cover.
Step 5. Unplug the cable from the connector on the QuickFind diagnostic board and remove the board from
the chassis.
Replacing the QuickFind Diagnostic Board
To replace the QuickFind diagnostic board, follow these steps:
Step 1. Gently plug the cable into the QuickFind diagnostic board connector.
Step 2. Replace the QuickFind diagnostic board into the cover by snapping it into place.
Step 3. Turn the assembly over and snap into place on top of the power supply cage.
270
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Replacement Parts
This appendix provides a replacement parts list that contains the following customer self-repair part
information for the server:
•
•
•
•
Manufacturing Part Number
Description
Replacement Part Number, if applicable
Exchange Part Number, if applicable
This appendix addresses the following topics:
•
•
Customer Self Repair
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for
greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period HP (or HP service
providers or service partners) identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will
ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are three categories of CSR parts:
•
Yes: Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory.
If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service.
Optional: Parts for which customer self repair is optional.
•
These parts are also designed for customer self repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for
you, there may or may not be additional charges, depending on the type of warranty service designated
for your product.
•
No: Some HP parts are not designed for customer self repair.
To satisfy the customer warranty, HP requires that an authorized service provider replace the part.
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts are shipped for next business day delivery.
Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance
is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the telephone.
HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be
returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective
part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be
returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective
part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a CSR, HP pays for all the shipping and part
return costs and determines the courier to be used.
For more information about HP's Customer Self Repair program, contact your local service provider. For the
North American program, see the HP website at:
http://www.hp.com/go/selfrepair
271
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts List
Table A-1 provides CSR information.
Table A-1
Customer Self Repair Information
Code
Level
Description
Comments
AY
Yes
Level A with instructions
available in the service
guide
Requires you to replace these parts under warranty.
No technical skills required.
BY
CY
N
Optional Level B with instructions
available in the service
guide
Low to moderate technical skills required.
Optional Level C with instructions
available in the service
guide
High technical skills required.
No
Not a customer
replaceable part.
Some HP parts are not designed for customer self
repair. In order to satisfy the customer warranty, HP
requires that an authorized service provider replace
the part.
Replacement Parts List
NOTE
If you need to replace a system board, first remove the processors, DIMMs, and adapter boards,
and then transfer them to the new board.
You must transfer all jumper and switch settings from the old board to the new board.
Use this parts list whenever ordering parts for the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers.
Table A-2
Replacement Parts List
Part
Number
Exchange
Customer
Self
Repair
Manufacturing
Part Number
Part Number
Replacement
Description
Cables
A6961-63006
A6961-63005
Internal SCSI, Cable
A6961-63006
A6961-63005
N/A
N
N
QuickFind Diagnostic to Midplane,
Cable
N/A
N/A
N/A
A6961-63004
A6961-63003
Power Distribution to Midplane
Ribbon, Cable
A6961-63004
A6961-63003
N
N
Power Distribution to Midplane 10
pin, Cable
272
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts List
Table A-2
Replacement Parts List (Continued)
Part
Number
Exchange
Customer
Self
Repair
Manufacturing
Part Number
Part Number
Replacement
Description
A6961-63011
SCSI Controller Jumper (Simplex
only), Cable
A6961-63011
N/A
N
A6961-63008
A6961-63002
A7231-63024
A7231-63025
PCA Boards
A6961-60007
A6961-60201
A6961-60204
A7124-04006
A6961-60005
A6961-04075
SCSI Backplane to Midplane, Cable
Display to IDE to Midplane, Cable
Single-channel Internal SCSI Cable
A6961-63008
A6961-63002
A7231-63024
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N
N
N
N
Dual-channel Internal SCSI Cables(2) A7231-63025
Processor Extender PCA
A6961-67007
A6961-67401
A6961-67204
A9739-67007
A6961-67005
A6961-67024
A6961-69007
A6961-69401
A6961-69204
A9739-69007
N/A
N
N
N
N
N
N
I/O Baseboard (includes VRMs) PCA
16 slot Memory Board PCA
32 slot Memory Board PCA
Midplane Riser Board PCA
SCSI Backplane/Management
Assembly, includes: Management
Board (A6961-60103) and SCSI
Backplane Board (A6961-60002) PCA
N/A
A6961-60106
A6961-60008
A6961-60009
SCSI Duplex Board (HP-UX) PCA
Front Panel Display PCA
A6961-67106
A6961-67008
A6961-67009
N/A
N/A
N/A
N
N
N
QuickFind (visual) Diagnostic Board
(includes plastic cover and label) PCA
A6961-60015
A6961-60113
Power Distribution Board PCA
A6961-67015
A6961-67113
N/A
N/A
N
N
I/O Board to DVD Connectivity
(IDE/USB) PCA
A6967AX
A6968AX
A6969AX
A6970AX
AB475AX
256 MB DIMM
512 MB DIMM
1 GB DIMM
2 GB DIMM
4 GB DIMM
A6967AX
A6968AX
A6969AX
A6970AX
AB475AX
N/A
AY
AY
AY
AY
AY
N/A
A6969-69001
A6835-69001
AB475-69001
Internal Disks and Removable Media
A9896-64001
A9897-64001
36 GB 15K RPM SCSI Disk (A9776A) 5065-5286EO
73 GB 15K RPM SCSI Disk (A9777A) 0950-4381EO
A9896-69001
A9897-69001
AY
AY
273
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts List
Table A-2
Replacement Parts List (Continued)
Part
Number
Exchange
Customer
Self
Repair
Manufacturing
Part Number
Part Number
Replacement
Description
A9898-64001
A7384-64202
146 GB 10K RPM SCSI Disk
(A9778A)
0950-4385E0
A9898-69001
AY
300 GB 10K RPM Hot Plug Ultra320
SCSI LP Drive
0950-4532E0
A7384-69001
AY
A7163-04001
A7007-04001
AB349-62001
Fans
DVD-R/CD-R Drive
DVD-R/CD-RW Drive
DVD-R/CD-RW Drive
A7163-67001
A7007-67001
AB349-67001
N/A
N/A
N/A
AY
AY
AY
A6961-04055
A6961-04028
I/O Fan
A6961-04055
A6961-04028
N/A
N/A
AY
AY
Power Supply Fan
Processor Modules and Assemblies
A7125-04004
800 MHz CPU Assembly with 32 MB
L2 Cache
A7125AX
A7125-69002
AD059-69001
BY
BY
AB526-62001
800 MHz PA8900 CPU Assembly with AD059A
64 MB L2 Cache requires PDC
greater than 44.21
A7135-04004
AB527-62001
1 GHz CPU Assembly with 32 MB L2 A7135AX
Cache
A7135-69002
AD060-69001
BY
BY
1 GHz PA8900 CPU Assembly with
64 MB L2 Cache requires PDC
greater than 44.21
AD060A
Miscellaneous
0950-4428
Power Supply
A6961-67016
A6961-67020
N/A
N/A
AY
AY
A6961-04047
PCI Card Divider (doorbell and latch
included)
A6961-40021
A6961-40001
1420-0386
PCI Retention Clip
A6961-67021
A6961-04089
N/A
N/A
N
Kit, I/O Baseboard Lever
System Battery (BR2330)
Filler, Memory Air Blocker
BY
BY
AY
N/A
N/A
A6961-40034
Rack Solutions
5069-3305
A6961-40034
Rack Mount Hardware, right
A6977-67001
N/A
N
(included with left bracket in kit)
274
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts List
Table A-2
Replacement Parts List (Continued)
Part
Number
Exchange
Customer
Self
Repair
Manufacturing
Part Number
Part Number
Replacement
Description
5069-3306
Rack Mount Hardware, left (included
with right bracket in kit)
A6977-67002
N/A
N
A7124-04004
A9955-4001
A6979-04001
Bezel, Rack Mount (rp4440)
Bezel, Rack Mount (rp4410)
Rackless pedestal kit
A7124-04004
A9955-04001
A6979-04001
N/A
N/A
N/A
CY
CY
N/A
Parts Shared with Other Products
A6825-60101
Single Port GigE LAN Card (PA8800
only)
A6825-67101
AB352-67001
N/A
N/A
BY
BY
AB352-60001
Dual-port GigE LAN Card (PA8900
only)
A6829-60101
A6961-60011
309520-001N
U160 Core I/O (PA8800 only)
A6829-67001
A6961-67011
N/A
N/A
BY
BY
BY
U320 Dual-port SCSI (PA8900 only)
N/A
SPS-BD, Controller, Smart Array,
2/4CSPS (A9890A)
309520-001
309521-001N
Board, Memory, 128M, 72BT, DDR,
W/BTY
309521-001
N/A
BY
275
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts List
276
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B Utilities
This appendix describes the utilities that are part of the server. These include the Boot Console Handler
(BCH) and the iLO MP.
This appendix addresses the following topics:
•
•
Boot Console Handler
The BCH user interface provides the interface between you and the firmware through the menus and simple
commands.
The BCH is separate code in processor-dependent code (PDC). The BCH code has two purposes:
•
•
Enables the bootstrap code to know which path to boot from.
Enables you to interact with PDC to view and modify a set of specific system parameters.
Booting is standard for PA RISC, but can be transparent depending on the state of the autoflags (boot,
search, and start). If the autoflags are clear and you override autobooting, a boot sequence ends in the
interactive portion of BCH where modification and viewing of some system parameters is possible.
NOTE
When the autostartflag is off, autoboots are interrupted if a configuration change occurs,
which causes reduced performance. Therefore, you must intervene before booting to the
internal system loader (ISL).
The auto boot halts at the BCH prompt. Continue booting by entering boot.
BCH Commands
The PDC user interface provides the following types of commands:
User Commands
Relate to common system management or administration tasks such as
configuration or boot.
Service Commands
Available to qualified service personnel. The service commands are
generally used to access information about faults that occur while the
system is running.
Table B-1
BCH Main Menu, Submenus, and Commands
Submenu Description
BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>]
PAth [PRI|ALT] [<path>]
Boots from the specified path.
Displays or modify a path.
277
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities
Boot Console Handler
Table B-1
BCH Main Menu, Submenus, and Commands (Continued)
Submenu
Description
Search for boot devices.
SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>]
COnfiguration menu
INformation menu
SERvice menu
Displays or sets boot values.
Displays hardware information.
Displays service commands.
DIsplay
Redisplays the current menu.
Displays help for menu or command.
Restarts the system.
HElp [<menu>|<command>
RESET
The boot device paths specify the primary boot device (PRI boot path), the high-availability alternate device
(HAA boot path), and the alternate device (ALT boot path).
Table B-2 lists the boot paths.
Table B-2
Boot Paths
Boot Source
Boot Path
0/1/1/0.0.0 (Simplex Mode)
Bottom Disk – Slot 1 (SCSI ID = 0)
0/1/1/1.0.0 (Duplex Mode)
0/1/1/0.1.0 (Duplex Mode)
0/0/3/0.0
Top Disk – Slot 2 (SCSI ID = 1)
DVD
BCH Main Menu Commands and Submenus
The following sections provide information and examples of the submenus and commands in the BCH
firmware user interface.
The BCH Main Menu is the first menu displayed when you enter the firmware user interface. The other menus
available are listed in this menu. Enter DI(display) to view the commands available from this menu.
Access other menus by entering the name of the menu at the command prompt. From a given menu, you can
run a command from any other menu by entering the menu name that is associated with the command,
followed by the command. For example, to run the TI(time) command (in the COnfiguration menu) from the
Main Menu, enter co ti. To see all available commands listed under their respective menus, enter HE(help) MA
(main).
Example screen output of the BCH Main Menu:
---- Main Menu ---------------------------------------------------------------
Command
Description
-------
-----------
BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>]
* PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>]
SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>]
Boot from specified path
Display or modify a path
Search for boot devices
278
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities
Boot Console Handler
COnfiguration menu
INformation menu
SERvice menu
Displays or sets boot values
Displays hardware information
Displays service commands
DIsplay
HElp [<menu>|<command>]
RESET
Redisplay the current menu
Display help for menu or command
Restart the system
----
Main Menu: Enter command or menu >
* You cannot modify the keyboard path.
Boot Command
Use the BO(boot) command to initiate the boot sequence from any menu in the interface. You can enter either
a default or specified path to the boot device. This path must be the definition of a device, for example,
FWSCSI.6.0 or PRI. The default is PRI.
Path Command
The PA(path) command displays or sets the current paths. Invoked with only one argument, PAdisplays the
current path of the entity passed as argument. For example, path altdisplays the current alternative boot
path, and path pri fwscsi.6.0sets up the primary boot path as the device attached to SCSI controller with
ID 6 and LUN 0. You can also set and display the paths of console (graphics/serial) and keyboard. For
example:
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > pa
Primary boot path:
intscsia.1
0/1/1/0.1
0/01/01/0.1
(hex)
Alternate boot path:
intscsib.2
0/1/1/0.2
0/01/01/01.2
(hex)
(hex)
(hex)
Console path:
Keyboard path:
0/7/1/1.0
0/07/01/01.1
0/0/4/0.0
0/0/04/0.0
Main Menu: Enter command or manu >
Search Command
The SEA(search) command automatically checks all possible boot and install devices connected to the system
and displays these bootable paths. In several firmware versions, it links these paths to a shortcut (such as
P0). It can also search the LAN, if the system can boot it. Some firmware revisions enable you to restrain the
search path, for example SEAlan or SEAdisk. The SEAcommand is available in the Main and COnfiguration
menus.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > sea
Searching for potential boot device(s)
279
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities
Boot Console Handler
This may take several minutes.
To discontinue search, press any key (termination may not be immediate).
IODC
Rev
Path# Device Path (dec) Device Path (mnem) Device Type
----- ----------------- ------------------ -----------
----
P0
P1
P2
P3
0/0/2/0.0
0/1/1/0.1
0/1/1/0.0
0/1/1/1.2
ide.0
Random access media
Random access media
Random access media
Random access media
1
1
1
1
intscsia.1
intscsia.0
intscsib.2
Configuration Menu
The COnfiguration Menu commands enable you to view and modify the configuration and state of the system.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > co
---- Configuration Menu ------------------------------------------------------
Command
-------
Description
-----------
AUto [BOot|SEArch|STart] [ON|OFF] Display or set specified flag
BootID [<proc>] [<bootid>]
BootINfo
BootTimer [0 - 200]
CPUconfig [<proc>] [ON|OFF]
DEfault
FastBoot [ON|OFF]
ResTart [ON|OFF]
PAth [PRI|ALT] [<path>]
SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>]
TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s]]
Display or set Boot Identifier
Display boot-related information
Seconds allowed for boot attempt
Config/Deconfig processor
Set the system to predefined values
Display or set boot tests execution
Display or set boot tests execution
Display or modify a path
Search for boot devices
Read or set the real time clock in GMT
BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>]
DIsplay
HElp [<command>]
RESET
Boot from specified path
Redisplay the current menu
Display help for specified command
Restart the system
MAin
Return to Main Menu
----
Configuration Menu: Enter command >
The configuration default command sets the following values:
Primary boot path:
0/0/1/0.0
Alternate boot path: 0/0/2/0
Console path:
Keyboard path:
Autoboot:
Autosearch:
Autostart:
BootTimer
0/0/1/0.0
0/0/4/0.0
ON
ON
OFF
0
280
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities
Boot Console Handler
Information Menu
The INformation menu commands enable you to view information about the configuration and state of the
system.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > in
---- Information Menu --------------------------------------------------------
Command
Description
-------
-----------
ALL
BootINfo
CAche
ChipRevisions
COprocessor
FwrVersion
Display all system information
Display boot-related information
Display cache information
Display revisions of major VLSI
Display coprocessor information
Display firmware version
* IO
LanAddress
MEmory
** PRocessor
*** WArnings
*** IORevisions
Display I/O interface information
Display Core LAN station address
Display memory information
Display processor information
Display selftest warning messages
Display selftest warning messages
BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>]
DIsplay
HElp [<command>]
RESET
Boot from specified path
Redisplay the current menu
Display help for specified command
Restart the system
MAin
Return to Main Menu
----
Information Menu: Enter command >
* The PCI device information displayed includes description, path, vendor ID, device ID, slot number, and bus
number.
** The PRocessorcommand displays the system model string.
***Warnings displayed are as follows:
•
•
WARNING: Too many CPUS for a rp4410 system. System will not boot.
WARNING: A fatal error has occurred-system cannot boot. Review warning messages in the information
menu.
Service Menu
The SERvice menu commands are used by service personnel to view information about the system for the
purpose of system service operations.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > ser
---- Service Menu ------------------------------------------------------------
Command
Description
-------
-----------
CLEARPIM
Clear (zero) the contents of PIM
Display or set SCSI controller values
Read memory and I/O locations
Display or clear the PDT
Display PIM information
SCSI [option] [<path>] [<val>]
MemRead <address> [<len>]
PDT [CLEAR]
PIM [<proc>] [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]
ProductNum <O|C> [<number>]
ScRoll [ON|OFF]
Display or set Product Number
Display or change scrolling ability
281
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities
iLO MP
SELftests [ON|OFF]
Enable/disable self test execution
BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>]
DIsplay
HElp [<command>]
RESET
Boot from specified path
Redisplay the current menu
Display help for specified command
Restart the system
MAin
Return to Main Menu
----
Service Menu: Enter command >
Display Command
The DI(display) command redisplays the current menu.
SCSI Command
The SCSIcommand displays and sets the SCSI controller parameters, such as initiator ID and speed. The OS
device drivers use these parameters to program the controller.
NOTE
These values are only suggested by the device driver; the actual values programmed into the
controller can be different.
ProductNum Command
The ProductNumcommand configures the original or current product number. The software ID (SWID) does
not get updated automatically when the original product number changes, but you can manually update the
SWID by resetting the system with the resetcommand.
iLO MP
The Integrated Lights-Out Management Processor (iLO MP) for entry-level PA-RISC is an autonomous
management subsystem embedded directly on the server. It is the foundation of server High Availability
(HA), embedded server, and fault management. It also provides system administrators secure remote
management capabilities regardless of server status or location. The iLO MP is available whenever the
system is connected to a power source, even if the server main power button is in the off position.
Remote access is the key to maximizing efficiency of administration and troubleshooting for enterprise
servers. Integrity servers have been designed so all administrative functions that can be performed locally on
the machine can also be performed remotely. iLO enables remote access to the operating system console,
control over the server power and hardware reset functionality, and works with the server to enable remote
network booting through a variety of methods.
HP has used several different names to describe the management functionality embedded in their servers,
including the “management processor.” In addition, HP uses the term “management processor” to refer to any
embedded microprocessor that manages a system. Management processor is a descriptive term (such as
“server”), and iLO is a brand name, or label (such as “Integrity”).
For complete information on the iLO MP, see the HP Integrity and HP 9000 Integrated Lights-Out
Management Processor Operations Guide.
282
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C Physical and Environmental Specifications
Table C-1 provides temperature and airflow information for minimum, typical, and maximum configurations
for the HP 9000 rp4410 and rp4440 servers. It also lists the server and rack weights and dimensions.
Table C-1
Physical and Environmental Specifications
Condition
Overall Server
(W x D x H)
Weight
Typical
Heat
Release
Airflow, at
Maximum
Ambient
Airflow, Nominal
a
180-264
VAC
degrees C
Server
Alone
Pede-
stal
Pede-
Rack
Rack
stal
Min.
Config.
410 Watts
1368 Watts
1065 Watts
W: 19 in
W: 10.3 in
(26.1 cm)
D: 27.4 in
(69.5 cm)
H: 20.9 in
(53.0 cm)
175
CFM
297
250
CFM
425
88 lbs
(40 kg)
100 lbs
(45.4 kg)
115 lbs
(53 kg)
(48.2 cm)
D: 27.2 in
(69.0 cm)
H: 6.8 in
(17.3 cm)
Max.
Config.
3
3
m /hr
m /hr
Typical
Config.
ASHRAE
Class 1
Min./
Config.
Airflow cooling scheme (front to
rear)
One CPU, one power supply, 1 GB DIMM, zero
DVD, one HDD, zero PCI cards, one core I/O.
Max.
Config.
Four CPUs, two power supplies, 128 GB DIMM,
one DVD, two HDD, six PCI cards, two core I/O.
Typical
Config.
Two CPUs, two power supplies, 16 GM DIMM,
one DVD, two HDD, two PCI cards, one core I/O.
a. Derate maximum dry bulb temperature 1 degree per 300 meters above 900 meters.
283
Appendix C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Physical and Environmental Specifications
284
Appendix C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
core I/O
attention
covers
B
backplane
backplane SCSI
battery
D
BCH
DHCP
commands
DHCP and DNS
dipswitch
booting HP-UX
disk drives
C
commands
duplex board SCSI
BCH
DVD drive
DVDdrive
console
E
Ethernet
control panel
controls
extender board, memory
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
F
fans
indicators
front cover
front panel
installing
G
Gigabit
H
MP
hard disk drive
hot-pluggable
IP address
hot-pluggable disk drives
K
keystone system
hot-swappable
HP-UX
L
LAN
HP-UX booting
LEDs
I
I/O
I/O baseboard
I/O subsystem
M
iLO MP
MAC address
configuring LAN
memory
DIMMs
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
extender board
power
N
power supply
O
operating system
booting
processor
P
PCI/PCI-X cards
Q
QuickFind diagnostic panel
R
rack
rear panel
pedestal
pinouts, connector
ports
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
T
remove and replace
tools
top cover
troubleshooting
U
user accounts
V
verify
S
W
SCSI
security
web
iLO MP
serial port
shut down
static IP address
system
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|